2018 F550superduty
User Manual: Pdf 2018-f550superduty
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 660
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual 2018 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com ford.ca January 2018 Second Printing Owner’s Manual Super Duty Litho in U.S.A. JC3J 19A321 AA The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2017 All rights reserved. Part Number: 201709 20171220012136 Table of Contents Supplementary Restraints System Introduction About This Manual ..........................................7 Symbols Glossary ............................................8 Data Recording ...............................................10 California Proposition 65 .............................12 Perchlorate ........................................................12 Ford Credit ........................................................12 Replacement Parts Recommendation ............................................................................12 Special Notices ...............................................13 Mobile Communications Equipment ...........................................................................1 4 Export Unique Options ................................15 Principle of Operation .................................46 Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................47 Side Airbags ....................................................52 Safety Canopy™ ............................................53 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......54 Airbag Disposal ..............................................55 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies .................................................56 Remote Control .............................................56 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control ..........................................................................6 2 Environment Protecting the Environment .......................16 MyKey™ At a Glance Principle of Operation .................................63 Creating a MyKey ..........................................64 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................65 Checking MyKey System Status ..............65 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems ........................................................65 MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................65 Instrument Panel Overview ........................17 Child Safety General Information ......................................19 Installing Child Restraints ..........................20 Booster Seats .................................................32 Child Restraint Positioning ........................34 Child Safety Locks ........................................35 Doors and Locks Locking and Unlocking ................................67 Keyless Entry ...................................................70 Seatbelts Principle of Operation ..................................37 Fastening the Seatbelts .............................38 Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................42 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime ............................................................42 Seatbelt Reminder .......................................43 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance ...............................................44 Seatbelt Extension .......................................45 Tailgate Tailgate Lock ....................................................72 Removing the Tailgate .................................72 Tailgate Step ...................................................73 Bed Extender ...................................................74 Security Passive Anti-Theft System ........................76 Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................78 1 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Table of Contents Global Opening .............................................99 Exterior Mirrors ...............................................99 Interior Mirror ..................................................101 Sliding Windows ..........................................102 Sun Visors .......................................................102 Moonroof ........................................................103 Power Running Boards Using Power Running Boards ..................80 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column .........................................................82 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column .........................................................82 Audio Control ..................................................83 Voice Control ..................................................84 Cruise Control ................................................84 Information Display Control ......................85 Heated Steering Wheel ..............................85 Instrument Cluster Gauges ............................................................105 Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............108 Audible Warnings and Indicators ............112 Information Displays General Information ....................................113 Information Messages ...............................129 Pedals Climate Control Adjusting the Pedals ...................................86 Manual Climate Control ...........................146 Automatic Climate Control ......................147 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate .........................................................................149 Heated Rear Window .................................152 Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................152 Cabin Air Filter ...............................................152 Remote Start .................................................152 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers ........................................87 Autowipers .......................................................87 Windshield Washers ....................................88 Lighting General Information ....................................89 Lighting Control .............................................89 Autolamps .......................................................90 Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................90 Daytime Running Lamps .............................91 Automatic High Beam Control .................92 Front Fog Lamps ...........................................93 Direction Indicators ......................................93 Spot Lamps .....................................................93 Interior Lamps ................................................94 Ambient Lighting ...........................................97 Cargo Lamps ...................................................97 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position .................154 Head Restraints ...........................................154 Manual Seats ................................................156 Power Seats ...................................................157 Memory Function ........................................159 Rear Seats .......................................................161 Heated Seats .................................................162 Climate Controlled Seats .........................163 Front Seat Armrest .....................................164 Rear Seat Armrest .......................................165 Windows and Mirrors Power Windows ............................................98 2 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Table of Contents Universal Garage Door Opener ..............166 Selective Catalytic Reductant System Diesel ...........................................................198 Diesel Particulate Filter ............................202 Auxiliary Power Points Transmission Universal Garage Door Opener Automatic Transmission .........................208 Power Take-Off ............................................213 Auxiliary Power Points ...............................170 Storage Compartments Four-Wheel Drive Center Console ..............................................172 Overhead Console .......................................172 Under Seat Storage .....................................172 Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................214 Rear Axle Limited Slip Differential ............................223 Electronic Locking Differential ...............223 Starting and Stopping the Engine General Information ....................................175 Ignition Switch ..............................................175 Keyless Starting ............................................176 Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/6.8L .........................................................................176 Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Diesel .........................................................................178 Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L Diesel .........................................................................183 Engine Idle Shutdown ................................183 Engine Block Heater ...................................183 Principle of Operation ...............................229 Using Traction Control ..............................229 Fuel and Refueling Stability Control Safety Precautions .....................................185 Fuel Quality - E85 .......................................186 Fuel Quality - Diesel ...................................187 Fuel Quality - Gasoline .............................189 Running Out of Fuel ...................................190 Refueling - Gasoline ...................................190 Refueling - Diesel .........................................191 Fuel Consumption .......................................193 Principle of Operation ...............................230 Using Stability Control ...............................231 Brakes General Information ..................................225 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes .........................................................................227 Parking Brake ................................................227 Hill Start Assist .............................................227 Traction Control Terrain Control Principle of Operation ...............................233 Using Hill Descent Control ......................233 Parking Aids Principle of Operation ...............................235 Rear Parking Aid ..........................................235 Rear View Camera ......................................236 360 Degree Camera ..................................239 Engine Emission Control Emission Law ................................................195 Catalytic Converter .....................................196 3 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Table of Contents Cruise Control Customer Assistance Principle of Operation ...............................243 Using Cruise Control ..................................243 Using Adaptive Cruise Control ..............244 Getting the Services You Need ..............310 In California (U.S. Only) ..............................311 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only) ......................312 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only) .......................313 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada ........................................................313 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature .........................................................................314 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) .........................................................................315 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only) .........................................................................315 Driving Aids Lane Keeping System ...............................250 Blind Spot Information System .............252 Cross Traffic Alert ........................................257 Steering ..........................................................259 Collision Warning System ........................261 Load Carrying Load Limit .....................................................264 Bed Ramps ...................................................268 Fuses Fuse Specification Chart ...........................317 Changing a Fuse .........................................326 Towing Towing a Trailer ............................................272 Trailer Reversing Aids ................................274 Trailer Sway Control ...................................281 Recommended Towing Weights ..........282 Essential Towing Checks .........................286 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels .....295 Maintenance General Information ..................................328 Opening and Closing the Hood .............328 Under Hood Overview - 6.2L ..................329 Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel .....330 Under Hood Overview - 6.8L ...................331 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L/6.8L ..............333 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel ............333 Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L ..................333 Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel ...............334 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ........................................................................335 Changing the Crankcase Vent Filter Element ......................................................336 Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................337 Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L .......338 Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel ......342 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check ........................................................................346 Transfer Case Fluid Check ......................349 Brake Fluid Check .......................................349 Driving Hints Breaking-In ...................................................298 Economical Driving ....................................298 Driving Through Water .............................299 Floor Mats .....................................................299 Snowplowing ...............................................300 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance .................................303 Hazard Flashers ..........................................304 Fuel Shutoff .................................................304 Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................305 Post-Crash Alert System .........................307 Transporting the Vehicle ..........................307 Towing Points ..............................................308 4 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Table of Contents Power Steering Fluid Check ...................350 Washer Fluid Check ...................................350 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L Diesel ............................................................351 Fuel Filter - 6.2L/6.8L ................................352 Changing the 12V Battery ........................353 Checking the Wiper Blades .....................355 Changing the Wiper Blades ....................355 Adjusting the Headlamps ........................355 Changing a Bulb ..........................................357 Bulb Specification Chart .........................360 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/6.8L ........................................................................362 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L Diesel ..........................................................363 Changing the Engine-Mounted and Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel Filters - 6.7L Diesel .................................365 Changing a Road Wheel .........................408 Technical Specifications ..........................418 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications - 6.2L ..................420 Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel ......420 Engine Specifications - 6.8L ....................421 Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L .............................422 Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel ................423 Motorcraft Parts - 6.8L .............................424 Vehicle Identification Number ...............425 Vehicle Certification Label ......................426 Transmission Code Designation ...........426 Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L ........................................................................427 Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L Diesel ...........................................................432 Capacities and Specifications - 6.8L ........................................................................439 Vehicle Care General Information ..................................370 Cleaning Products ......................................370 Cleaning the Exterior .................................370 Waxing ..............................................................371 Cleaning the Engine ...................................372 Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel .......372 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades ........................................................................373 Cleaning the Interior ...................................373 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens .......................375 Cleaning Leather Seats .............................375 Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............377 Cleaning the Wheels ..................................377 Vehicle Storage ............................................377 Audio System General Information ..................................445 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM .....446 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC ..........................................................448 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Touchscreen Display .............................453 Digital Radio .................................................454 Satellite Radio .............................................456 USB Port ........................................................459 SYNC™ General Information .................................460 Using Voice Recognition ..........................462 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........464 SYNC™ Applications and Services ......476 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player .........................................................................481 SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................490 Wheels and Tires General Information ..................................380 Tire Care .........................................................382 Using Snow Chains ...................................400 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........400 5 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Table of Contents SYNC™ 3 General Information .................................498 Home Screen ...............................................509 Using Voice Recognition ...........................510 Entertainment ...............................................517 Climate ............................................................527 Phone ..............................................................529 Navigation .....................................................535 Apps ................................................................543 Settings ..........................................................546 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................560 Accessories Accessories ...................................................574 Auxiliary Switches ......................................575 Ford Protect Ford Protect ..................................................579 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information .......581 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........584 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance ............................................589 Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........598 Appendices Electromagnetic Compatibility ............609 End User License Agreement ..................611 Type Approvals ............................................637 6 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Note: Your vehicle’s powertrain control systems can detect and store information about vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output such as whether or not performance-enhancing powertrain components commonly referred to as performance chips have been used. This information will stay in the system’s memory and cannot be erased even if the modification is removed. Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, Ford of Mexico and service or repair facilities can retrieve this information when servicing your vehicle. Ford Motor Company may use this information to determine if your warranty covers any needed repairs. ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine, transmission and exhaust system damage. See your warranty information for more details. Your new diesel engine may feel, drive and function somewhat differently than a gasoline engine. Therefore, it is very important that you read and thoroughly familiarize yourself and others operating the vehicle with this guide. There is a special procedure for turning off the diesel engine. See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 178). It is important to read and understand this material in order to maintain the best service life for your engine. Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options that are not on your vehicle. It is possible that either Ford Motor Company or an authorized Ford dealer may have originally sold an incomplete vehicle to a vehicle modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some of the options and features on this vehicle may differ from what we describe in this manual. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications without any notice and without incurring obligations. This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so they may appear differently to you on your vehicle. Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. 7 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Brake fluid - non petroleum based Brake system E270480 Cabin air filter E154903 Check fuel cap A Right-hand side B Left-hand side Child safety door lock or unlock Note: Throughout this guide, you will find warnings identified by the warning symbol. Warnings remind you to be especially careful to reduce the risk of personal injury. Child seat lower anchor SYMBOLS GLOSSARY Child seat tether anchor These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Cruise control Air conditioning system E71340 Do not open when hot E162384 E231157 Air conditioning system lubricant type Engine air filter Anti-lock braking system Engine coolant Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine coolant temperature Battery Engine oil Battery acid Explosive gas 8 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Fan warning Maintain correct fluid level Fasten seatbelt Note operating instructions E71880 Flammable Horn control E231160 E270945 Front airbag Panic alarm Front fog lamps Parking aid E67017 E139213 Fuel pump reset Parking brake Fuse compartment Power steering fluid Hazard flashers Power windows front/rear Heated rear window Power window lockout Windshield defrosting system Requires registered technician E231159 Interior luggage compartment release Safety alert Jack See Owner's Manual Keep out of reach of children See Service Manual E231158 E161353 Lighting control Service engine soon Low tire pressure warning Passenger airbag activated E270849 9 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Passenger airbag deactivated as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries. See SYNC™ (page 460). E270850 Side airbag Shield the eyes E167012 Stability control E138639 Windshield wiping system E270969 Windshield wash and wipe DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, (for example, your contact information), to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; 10 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 460). This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read 11 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ (page 460). For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 FORD CREDIT WARNINGS Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. US Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. We offer a number of convenient ways for you to contact us, and to manage your account. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Call 1-800-727-7000. For more information about Ford Credit and access to Account Manager, go to www.ford.com/finance. REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. 12 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle has sophisticated electronic controls. One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. WARNINGS You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Collision Repairs Never place front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats in front of an active passenger airbag. We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector WARNING Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector. Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming services. Installing an aftermarket device that uses the DLC during normal driving for purposes such as remote insurance company monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to other devices or entities, or altering the performance of the vehicle, may cause interference with or even damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will not cover damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in device. SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. 13 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow If your vehicle has the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The label is on the driver side door pillar or on the rear edge of the driver door. You can determine whether the ambulance manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting that manufacturer. The Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available on certain diesel engine equipped vehicles. More information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a snowplow are in this Owner's Manual. See Snowplowing (page 300). Using a Slide-In Camper For information regarding the use of slide-in campers, consult the Truck Camper Loading document supplied with your vehicle. Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power Source Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance Information and guidelines for operating a vehicle with an aftermarket power take-off system are in this Owner's Manual. See Power Take-Off (page 213). If your light truck has the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. We urge ambulance manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and then by selecting Contact Us or by phone at 1–877–840–4338. MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void the emissions warranties. In addition, ambulance usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which could lead to fires. Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in 14 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Introduction emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 15 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You should play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. For details about Ford Motor Company's sustainability progress and initiatives visit: Web Address www.sustainability.ford.com 16 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing At a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW E251634 A Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 93). H Audio. See Audio System (page 445). B Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 87). I Climate control. See Climate Control (page 146). C Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 113). J Rear defrost. K Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 176). D Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 105). L Voice control. See Voice Control (page 84). E Navigation, media, phone. M Horn. F Entertainment display. N G Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 304). Cruise control. See Cruise Control (page 243). O Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 82). 17 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing At a Glance P Parking brake release. See Brakes (page 225). Q Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 89). 18 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS Technician (CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNINGS Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 19 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended restraint type Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than Larger children 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seatback upright. INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Child Seats E142594 20 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety • Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). • Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab) Place the vehicle seat upon which the child restraint will be installed in the upright position. Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Perform the following steps when installing the child restraint with combination lap and shoulder belts: WARNINGS Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint. Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. E142528 1. When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E142529 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 21 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety E142530 E142875 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the belt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142533 22 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab) 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle helps to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). WARNINGS Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Always use both the lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt in the center seating position. The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. The belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. E142528 1. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. Position the child safety seat in the front center seat. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. E162708 23 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety 2. Slide the tongue up the webbing. E142533 5. While pushing down with your knee on the child restraint, pull up on the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. 6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle. 7. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). E142530 3. While holding both shoulder and lap portions next to the tongue, route the tongue and webbing through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142534 8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. 24 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety 9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap and shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt tight during a crash. 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat Outboard Positions) (If Equipped) E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142528 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E146523 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E146522 25 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E146524 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the lap portion of the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward until you pull all of the belt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. E146525 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling down on the lap belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks the child restraint for installation. The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal, even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode. Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances, these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 26 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety WARNINGS Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. E142534 10. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors where the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor behind that seating position. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint. However, you can still use the seatbelt to attach the child restraint if the lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child restraints, you must also attach the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) WARNINGS Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child restraint installation at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on Regular Cab): 27 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Crew Cab and Super Cab E166694 Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. E166695 The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child restraint with LATCH attachments. The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 26 in (652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. You cannot install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. LATCH compatible child restraints (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent child restraint is attached to that anchor. Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child restraint only to the anchors shown. 28 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do this for a proper installation. The passenger seats of your vehicle may have built-in tether strap anchors behind the seats as described below. The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the seat backrest or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the seat cushion. The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super Cab has three straps along the top of the seat backrest that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): When used in combination, either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child restraint. Regular Cab Using Tether Straps Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle. E166696 E251549 29 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Crew Cab and Super Cab E251550 2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. You may need to pull the seat backrest forward to access the tether anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child restraint. 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Regular Cab passenger and center seats (located on back panel) Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Regular Cab) Note: For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. 1. E175295 If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and under the head restraint. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. 30 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew Cab and Super Cab) E162715 1. Route the vehicle tether loop between the head restraint posts, then route the child seat tether strap through the loop, forward of the head restraint. 2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether anchor loop in the adjacent seating position. If using the driver side, pass the strap behind the shoulder belt for the center seat. Always put the tether strap through the routing loop. The head restraint support post holds the child restraint tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child restraint during a crash. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. E167009 There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat (along the bottom edge of the rear window). Use these loops as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child safety seat tether straps. For example, you can use the center loop as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child restraints installed in the outboard rear seats. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child restraint. If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. To provide a tight tether strap: 31 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety • BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. • • • • Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. Types of Booster Seats Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: E68924 • Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. E142595 32 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E70710 • High back booster seats E142596 E142597 33 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. WARNINGS conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. WARNINGS Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash. Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder belt under a child's arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. 34 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Child Safety Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X Restraint Type Combined weight of child and child seat LATCH (lower anchors and top tether anchor) LATCH (lower anchors only) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt and LATCH only and top (lower tether anchors anchor and top tether anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child seat (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child seat Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 154). CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. E112197 35 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing X X X X Child Safety The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 36 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNINGS Always drive and ride with the seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Seatbelts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serious injury or death. Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear seatbelts for optimum protection in an accident. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder belts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seatbelt properly. The seatbelt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder seatbelts. • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking mode, (except driver seatbelt). • Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions. • Seatbelt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. E71880 Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the seatbelt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. • Seatbelt warning light and chime. E67017 • 37 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. Seatbelts The seatbelt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. In side crashes and rollovers, the seatbelt pretensioners activate when the Safety Canopy is activated. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS E142588 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat on Super Cab and Crew Cab) The cinch tongue slides up and down the belt webbing when you stow the belt or while putting seatbelts on. When you buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap portion, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt properly and do not allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions. E142587 1. Before you can reach and latch a lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue in the buckle. 38 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement. Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy WARNING Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure. E162708 1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor. 2. While holding the webbing below the tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward. 3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle. Fastening the Cinch Tongue WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt crosses your shoulder and chest. 2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist. 3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. 4. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue to the buckle by pulling on the tongue. E142590 Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. 39 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts Seatbelt Locking Modes When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode WARNING Use this mode any time you install a child safety seat in a front outboard passenger seating position in a Regular Cab, SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The optional front seat's center seatbelt has a cinch mechanism. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in a rear seat whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 19). If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver seatbelt has the first type of locking mode, and the front outboard passenger and rear seat seatbelts have both types of locking modes described as follows: How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Non-inflatable seatbelts Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly, turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat backrest or push the seat backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. E142591 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically pre-locks. The belt still retracts to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt. 40 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second row only– if equipped) The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the second-row outboard seating positions. Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when properly installed. This is because they are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags. After inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool to the touch. The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the following: • An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt webbing. • Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic locking mode. • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front seatbelts. • Impact sensors in various parts of the vehicle. E146363 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. How does the rear inflatable seatbelt system work? How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode WARNING Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped) WARNING The rear inflatable seatbelts function like standard restraints in everyday usage. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 41 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash. E146364 During a crash of sufficient force, the inflatable belt inflates from inside the webbing. E145664 Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. E146365 To adjust the shoulder belt height: 1. Pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down. 2. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. The fully inflated belt's increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position, and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers. SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, rollovers and some side impact crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the E71880 driver seatbelt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. 42 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts Conditions of operation If Then The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few tion... seconds. The driver seatbelt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The seatbelt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The seatbelt warning light and indicator chime remain off. SEATBELT REMINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the seatbelt warning function. It provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the seatbelt warning light when you are in the driver seat and a seatbelt is unbuckled. If... Then... You buckle your seatbelt before you switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. The Belt-Minder feature activates - the You do not buckle your seatbelt before your seatbelt warning light illuminates and a vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the warning tone sounds for six seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about five ignition on... minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt. The driver seatbelt is unbuckled for about The Belt-Minder feature activates - the one minute while the vehicle is traveling at seatbelt warning light illuminates and the least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 warning tone sounds for six seconds every minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about five on... minutes or until you buckle your seatbelt. 43 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature (Driver only) 4. While the seatbelt warning light is on, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt. After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This will switch the feature off if it is currently on. • This will switch the feature on if it is currently off. WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate the system while driving the vehicle. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 63). Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • All vehicle doors are closed. • The driver seatbelt is unbuckled. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine. 2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light turns off (about one minute). You must complete Step 3 within 30 seconds after the seatbelt warning light turns off. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt three times at a moderate speed, ending with the seatbelt in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light turns on. Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle Care (page 370). 44 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seatbelts SEATBELT EXTENSION WARNINGS Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash. Only use extensions provided free of charge by Ford Motor Company dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt restraint system. Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints. Do not use a seatbelt extension with an inflatable seatbelt. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the belt across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach. If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelts manufacturer should be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint system. 45 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To avoid risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. 46 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch (If Equipped) WARNINGS Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. WARNINGS Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position. Your vehicle may have an airbag deactivation switch. Before driving, always look at the switch to make sure it is in the appropriate position. Failure to put the switch in the proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a crash. E151127 E181984 The driver and front passenger airbags deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. High-series vehicles (if equipped) The front passenger airbag on and off switch has indicators that illuminate, indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp is near the center of the instrument panel. The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). Note: The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps illuminate for a short period of time when you switch the ignition on to confirm it is functional. 47 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System Switch position Passenger airbag status indicator Passenger airbag Off OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit On OFF: Unlit Enabled ON: Lit WARNINGS If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do not place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag on and off switch and the passenger airbag is turned off. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial. E229376 Low-series vehicles (if equipped) The front passenger airbag on and off switch has an indicator that illuminates and stays lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off. The indicator lamp is near the center of the instrument panel. The passenger airbag on and off switch is in the glovebox. Note: The indicator lamp illuminates for a short period of time when you switch the ignition on to confirm it is functional. Turning the Passenger Airbag Off WARNINGS If the light does not illuminate when the passenger airbag switch is off and you switch the ignition on, have the passenger airbag switch serviced immediately by a qualified technician. To avoid switching on the airbag, always remove the ignition key with the switch in the off position. E181522 48 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System 1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch to OFF and hold in OFF while removing the key. 2. When you switch the ignition on, the passenger airbag off light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts off and then turns back on. This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated. The passenger airbag remains off until you turn it back on. Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On WARNINGS The seatbelts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions are specifically designed to operate together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When you switch off your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your seatbelt system. If the passenger does not meet the requirements stated in the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration or Transport Canada deactivation criteria, switching off the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a crash. E181521 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON. 2. The passenger airbag off light will briefly illuminate when you switch the ignition on. This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational. The passenger side airbag should always be on (the passenger airbag off light should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration or Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows. If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use seatbelts and child restraints properly. Do not place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag on and off switch and the passenger airbag is turned off. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial. The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle, especially in the If the passenger airbag off light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch is on and the ignition is on, have the passenger airbag switch serviced immediately by a qualified technician. 49 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • front seat. This provides the protection of seatbelts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the seatbelts, because seatbelts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags. • The vehicle has no rear seat; The vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition. 2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Deactivation Criteria (Excluding Canada) • • WARNING This vehicle has special energy management seatbelts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular seatbelts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The energy management seatbelt gives or releases additional seatbelt webbing in some accidents to reduce the concentration of force on an occupant's chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy management seatbelt might permit the passenger wearing the seatbelt to move forward enough to have a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure the airbag is on for any passenger who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration deactivation criteria. • The vehicle has no rear seat; Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or The child has a medical condition which, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition. 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: • • 1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: 50 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. Supplementary Restraints System • • Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only) WARNING This vehicle has special energy management seatbelts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular seatbelts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The energy management seatbelt gives or releases additional seatbelt webbing in some accidents to reduce the concentration of force on an occupant's chest and to reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the airbag is off, this energy management seatbelt might permit the passenger wearing the seatbelt to move forward enough to have a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk. Make sure the airbag is on for any passenger who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration deactivation criteria. • 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that, according to his or her physician: • • • Poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment 1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • • My vehicle has no rear seat; Although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; The child has a medical condition that, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child's condition. WARNING My vehicle has no rear seat; The rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant's condition. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. 2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because: 51 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving your vehicle. This provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases. SIDE AIRBAGS WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. E142846 If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. 52 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. SAFETY CANOPY™ WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are found on your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the seatback of the driver and front passenger seats. To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag. ·Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. The Safety Canopy deploys during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be 53 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. E75004 The system consists of the following: • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module which deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®. Based on the type of crash (frontal impact, side impact or rollover), the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with a readiness E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See Instrument Cluster (page 105). Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 54 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Supplementary Restraints System E67017 • • The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on. • The readiness light will either flash or stay lit. A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. • If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. 55 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES Note: If you are in range, the remote control still operates if you press any button unintentionally. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Intelligent Access (If Equipped) The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: • You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an intelligent access key. • You press the tailgate release button. • You press a button on the remote control. Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the remote control battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 56). The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • Weather conditions. • Nearby radio towers. • Structures around the vehicle. • Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If Other short-distance radio transmitters, such as amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems may operate on the same frequency as your remote control. If other transmitters are operating on those frequencies, you may not be able to use your remote control. Using your remote control near some types of electronic equipment, such as USB devices, computers or cell phones can interfere with remote operation. Operating your remote control near metal or metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can interfere with remote operation. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Equipped) Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle. The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as a remote control. 56 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls E191532 Press the button to release the key blade. Press and hold the button to fold the key blade back in when not in use. E226461 The intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to use the push button start. Removable Key Blade E151795 The intelligent access key also contains a removable key blade that you can use to unlock your vehicle. Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped) Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. 57 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls A message appears in the information display when the remote control battery is low. See General Information (page 113). Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. Press the button to release the key blade before beginning the procedure. E226462 Press the release button and pull the key blade out. E191533 1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and gently push the clip. 2. Press the clip down to release the battery cover. E151795 Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. E151799 3. Carefully remove the cover. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally. 58 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls E151800 Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 4. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown to release the battery. E226462 1. E151801 5. Remove the battery. 6. Insert a new battery with the + facing upward. 7. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter. Intelligent Access Key The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. 59 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Press the release button and pull the key blade out. Keys and Remote Controls E218402 3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and carefully remove the battery. 4. Insert a new battery with the + facing upward. 5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter and install the key blade. E218401 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover. Memory Feature (If Equipped) You can use the remote control to recall memory positions. Press the unlock button on a linked remote control to recall memory positions. If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, the seat moves to the easy entry position. The seat moves to the driver memory position when you switch the ignition on. Linking a Preset Position to your Remote Control See Memory Function (page 159). 60 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls Car Finder The remote start system does not work if any of the following occur: • The ignition is on. • The anti-theft alarm triggers. • You switch off the feature. • The hood is open. • The transmission is not in park (P). • The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. • The service engine soon light is on. Press the button twice within three seconds. A tone sounds E138623 and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. Sounding the Panic Alarm E138624 Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to Remote Control Feedback turn it off. An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands. Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. Remote Start (If Equipped) WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that are not well ventilated. Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low. The remote start button is on the transmitter. E138625 This feature allows you to start your vehicle from the outside. The transmitter has an extended operating range. LED Status Solid green Remote start or extension successful Solid red Remote stop successful; vehicle off Blinking red Remote start or stop failed Blinking green Waiting for status update Remote Starting Your Vehicle Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. You can configure vehicles with automatic climate control to turn on the automatic climate control when you remote start your vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control (page 147). A manual climate control system runs at the setting you set it to when you switched your vehicle off. Many states and provinces restrict the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems. E138626 61 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Keys and Remote Controls The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure. Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after the engine stops running. To remote start your vehicle: Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote Starting 1. Press the lock button. 2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice. Press the button once. The parking lamps turn off. E138625 You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle. The horn sounds if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You can switch it on or off in the information display. See General Information (page 113). You can turn the remote start system on or off using the information display. See General Information (page 113). Note: If you do not follow this sequence, your vehicle does not start remotely, the direction indicators do not flash twice and the horn does not sound. REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must switch on the ignition before driving your vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter, you must press the push button ignition switch on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 76). The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically. The parking lamps remain on and your vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting. Extending the Engine Running Time To extend the engine running time duration of your vehicle during remote start, repeat steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration extends by another 10 minutes. For example, if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle continues to run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend the remote start up to a maximum of 35 minutes. 62 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing MyKey™ PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. You can program the restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys that you did not program are administrator keys or admin keys. • You can use admin keys to: • Create a MyKey with certain vehicle restrictions. • Program certain MyKey settings. • Clear all MyKey restrictions. • After you program a MyKey, you can view the following information through the information display: • The total number of admin keys and MyKeys for your vehicle. • The total distance a MyKey driver traveled with your vehicle. Certain driver alerts, stability systems or parking aids turn on automatically when you use the MyKey system. For example, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane departure warning or forward collision warning. Restricted touchscreen operation in some markets. For example, MyKey may prevent manual navigation destination input while the vehicle is in any gear other than park (P) or when the vehicle reaches a certain rate of speed. Satellite radio adult content restrictions, if this feature is available in your market. Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle. Note: MyKey drivers can turn on the forward collision warning when it is turned off by an admin key. Note: Every MyKey receives the same restrictions and settings. You cannot program them individually. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute. Note: For vehicles equipped with a push-button start switch: When both a MyKey and an admin key are present when you start your vehicle, the system recognizes the admin key only. Optional Settings You can configure certain vehicle feature settings when you first create a MyKey. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key. Standard Settings Not every vehicle includes the features listed below. If your vehicle has this equipment, then you cannot change the following settings when using a MyKey: • Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey mutes the audio system until drivers, and in some instances, passengers, fasten their seatbelts. • Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel warning activates earlier for MyKey drivers, giving them more time to refuel. Note: Not every feature applies to every vehicle in every market. When they are available for your vehicle, then they appear in your information display, providing choices to switch them on or off, or to select a more specific setting. 63 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing MyKey™ • Various vehicle speed limits so the MyKey driver cannot exceed certain speeds. The information display shows warnings followed by an audible tone when the MyKey driver reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey. 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program. If your vehicle has a push-button start, place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 76). 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin programming your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 113). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. Note: Make sure you label the programmed MyKey so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. WARNING Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. • • • Various vehicle speed reminders so MyKey drivers know when their vehicle speed approaches the limits. Warnings appear in your information display and a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers exceed the set vehicle speed. The audio system's maximum volume limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can concentrate on the road. A message appears in the information display when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the limited volume. MyKey also disables the automatic volume control. Always on setting. This setting forces certain features to remain on and active for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or emergency assistance and the do not disturb features stay on even if a MyKey driver uses the feature's control to switch it off. You can also program the optional MyKey settings. Programming or Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to program or change your optional MyKey settings. 1. Switch the ignition on using the key or the transmitter you want to program. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to change the settings of your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 113). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute. 64 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing MyKey™ 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish programming your MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close the driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you switch the engine off, you must use an admin key to change or clear your optional MyKey settings. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. See Information Displays (page 113). MyKey Distance Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. CLEARING ALL MYKEYS When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display. Number of MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys have been deleted. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin clearing your MyKey programming. See Information Displays (page 113). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish clearing your MyKeys. Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. You cannot remove the MyKey restrictions individually. Number of Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING 65 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing MyKey™ Condition I cannot create a MyKey. Potential causes · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 76). · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at least one admin key. · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64). For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey · An admin transmitter is present when you restrictions are available when starting the started your vehicle. vehicle. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 64). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 64). I lost the only admin key. · Purchase a new key or transmitter from your authorized dealer. I lost a key. · Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 76). MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. · An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. · The key system has been reset. 66 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Doors and Locks Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking allows your entire vehicle to unlock with one press of the button. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate (page 72). Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks your entire vehicle when you disable two-stage unlocking. Power Door Locks (If Equipped) The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. Locking the Vehicle E138623 Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators flash. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors lock again, the horn sounds and the direction indicators flash if all the doors are closed. E138628 A Unlock. Mislock B Lock. If any door is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice and the direction indicators do not flash. Remote Control (If Equipped) You can use the remote control at any time your vehicle is not running. Activating Intelligent Access (If Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage Unlock) General Information Equipped) You can unlock and lock the vehicle without taking the keys out of your pocket or purse when your intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access uses a sensor on the back of the door handle for unlocking and a separate sensor on the face of each door handle for locking. Press the button to unlock the driver door. Press the button E138629 again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators flash. The direction indicators flash twice to confirm the change. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access. The system does not function if: • Your vehicle battery has no charge. • The key battery has no charge. • The key frequencies are jammed. 67 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Doors and Locks Note: The system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped) Note: If the system does not function, use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. See Remote Control (page 56). Unlocking Using Intelligent Access E187693 E248555 Press the exterior tailgate release button inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate unlocks and opens. See Tailgate Lock (page 72). With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful to not touch the lock sensor at the same time or pulling the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your intelligent access key fob. Smart Unlock (If Equipped) This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. If you leave your key in the ignition, when you open the driver door and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control, the doors lock then unlock. Locking Using Intelligent Access You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by: • Using the manual lock on the inside of the door. • Locking the driver door with a key. • Using the keyless entry keypad. • Using the lock button on the remote control. E248556 With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful to not touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking. Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. Note: Do not use the outside door handle as a roof cargo strap. 68 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Doors and Locks Autounlock When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control (with the door open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your vehicle searches for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after you close the door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors immediately unlock. Autounlock unlocks all the doors when: • The ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to the accessory position. • You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to accessory. In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle, you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad, pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. Note: The doors do not autounlock if you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door. When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors lock then unlock if the ignition is on. Enabling or Disabling Autounlock You can enable or disable the autounlock feature in the information display or an authorized dealer can do it for you. See General Information (page 113). Autolock (If Equipped) Autolock locks all the doors when: • All doors are closed. • The ignition is on. • You shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote entry system. The illuminated entry system turns off the lights if: • The ignition is on. • You press the remote control lock button. • After 25 seconds of illumination. Autolock repeats when: • You open then close any door while the ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). The dome lamp does not turn on if the control is set to the off position. The lights do not turn off if: • You switch them on with the dimmer control. • Any door is open. 69 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Doors and Locks Battery Saver You can operate the keypad with the factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of your own five-digit personal entry codes. The battery saver turns off the interior lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the ignition if a door is open and the dome lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp switch is off. Programming a Personal Entry Code Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) To create your own personal entry code: SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD 1. Enter the factory-set code. 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You must enter each number within five seconds of each other. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code one. The keypad is near the driver window and illuminates when you touch it. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful. Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. To program additional personal entry codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4: • Press 3·4 to save personal code two. • Press 5·6 to save personal code three. • Press 7·8 to save personal code four. • Press 9·0 to save personal code five. If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after you close all of the doors. KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped) Tips: • Do not set a code that uses five of the same number. • Do not use five numbers in sequential order. • The factory-set code will work even if you have set your own personal code. E190936 Erasing a Personal Code You can use the keypad to: • Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. • Program and erase user codes. • Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2. 70 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Doors and Locks All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code will work. Anti-Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after: • One minute of keypad inactivity. • Pressing the unlock button on the remote control. • Switching the ignition on. • Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access. Unlocking and Locking the Doors To Unlock the Driver Door Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps illuminate. Note: All doors unlock if you disable the two-stage unlocking feature. See General Information (page 113). To Unlock All Doors Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 control within five seconds. To Lock All Doors Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time with the driver door closed. You do not need to enter the keypad code first. 71 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Tailgate (If Equipped) TAILGATE LOCK (If Equipped) The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of the tailgate. E248384 2. Locate and disconnect the frame connections. They are on the left-hand side of the vehicle. Note: Your vehicle may have up to three frame connections. E224958 Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock. Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn it to the right to unlock the tailgate. 3. Install the caps from the tailgate removal kit on the in-line connectors that remain on the vehicle. Note: If you do not install the caps on the connectors, some features may not operate as intended. REMOVING THE TAILGATE WARNING 4. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully feed the tailgate harness up through the bumper and place it out of the way. 5. Lower the tailgate. Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others. You can remove the tailgate for more loading room. 1. Obtain the tailgate removal kit from the glove box. E163092 6. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw. Disconnect the cable. 72 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Tailgate (If Equipped) 7. Disconnect the other cable. 8. Lift the tailgate to a 45 degree angle from horizontal. 9. Lift the right side off its hinge. 10. Lift the tailgate to an 80 degree angle from horizontal. 11. Remove the tailgate from the left side hinge by sliding it to the right. Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate. E187718 TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped) 3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step to its lowest position. Use the step to make entering the truck bed easier. To reduce the risk of falling: • Only operate the step when your vehicle is on a level surface. • Only operate the step in areas with sufficient lighting. • Always open the step panel to widen the step. • Always use the grab handle when climbing on the step. • Do not use the step with bare feet. • Make sure the step is clean before use. • Keep the step load, you plus the load, below 350 lb (159 kg). E189557 4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward out of the tailgate until it fully extends. 5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal to vertical until you hear a click. You have locked the handle in place. Note: Do not tow with the step or grab handle. Opening the Step Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the step before moving your vehicle. Do not drive with the step or grab handle open. Replace the slip resistance tape or grab handle molding if it appears as worn or damaged. 1. Lower the tailgate. 2. Push the button in the center of the step molding. The step pops out slightly. 73 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Tailgate (If Equipped) Closing the Step 1. 1. Press the yellow button on the telescoping handle to lower the handle, then press the yellow lever at the bottom of the handle to unlock the handle. Rotate the handle down from vertical to horizontal and push it into the tailgate. 2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal, then push it back into the tailgate until the step is secure. BED EXTENDER (If Equipped) Pull the locking pin toward the center of your vehicle. E163096 2. Open the latches to release the panels. Note: Do not use the bed extender when driving off road. Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins and knobs fully before driving your vehicle. Note: Make sure to secure all cargo. Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68 kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle is moving. Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the tailgate mode when you are not using it for restraining cargo. Always keep the bed extender in the grocery mode or the stowed position with the tailgate closed. E163097 3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate. Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of your vehicle. Tailgate mode E163095 E163098 74 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Tailgate (If Equipped) 4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels. E163099 5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box. Reverse the steps to store the bed extender. Grocery mode E163100 Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode instructions by rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate. 75 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Security The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as a remote control. PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in engine starting problems and a loss of security protection. The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and turns on the intelligent access with push button start system, as well as a remote control. Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may result in vehicle starting problems, especially if they are too close to the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key when starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your vehicle if a problem occurs. If your coded keys are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Contact an authorized dealer. Store an extra programmed key away from your vehicle in a safe place. You can purchase replacement keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle. Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter SecuriLock® Note: You can program a maximum of four keys to your vehicle. All six can be integrated keyhead transmitters. The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent your vehicle from starting. A message may appear in the information display. You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure programs both the vehicle immobilizer keycode and the remote control to your vehicle. If you are unable to start your vehicle with a coded key, it is not operating correctly. A message may appear in the information display. Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys. You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available. Automatic Arming The system arms when you switch the ignition off. Automatic Disarming Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. The system disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key. 1. Replacement Keys Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys. 76 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. Security 2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least 3 seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. 3. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. 4. After at least 3 seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition. 5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least 3 seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. 6. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition. 7. After at least 3 seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition. 8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds. 9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition. This procedure programs both the vehicle immobilizer keycode and the remote control to your vehicle. You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access key readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Carry out all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you carry out any steps out of sequence. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. If you have successfully programmed the new integrated keyhead transmitter, it will start your vehicle and operate the remote entry system. If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 9. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key Note: Do not place the device on the wireless accessory charging area when programming intelligent access keys. Note: You can program a maximum of six keys to your vehicle. All six must be intelligent access keys. 77 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Security Type One 2. Remove the tray and the cover from the center console. With the buttons facing upward, place the first intelligent access key in the backup slot. 3. Press the push button ignition switch. 4. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. 5. Remove the intelligent access key. 6. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch. 7. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. 8. Remove the intelligent access key. 9. Wait five seconds, then place the unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch. Programming is now complete. Check that the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new intelligent access key. If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10 seconds and repeat steps 1 through 7. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer. E226701 Type Two ANTI-THEFT ALARM The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of unauthorized vehicle entry and is also designed to help prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle. You can choose what is monitored by arming the system in different ways. See Information Displays (page 113). The direction indicators flash and the horn sounds if the system triggers while the alarm is armed. E269950 1. Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. Remove the key blade from the transmitter. 78 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Security Using the System The direction indicators flash once after you lock your vehicle. This indicates the alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully arms after 20 seconds. You can select two levels of alarm security. You can change the level of security through the information display. See General Information (page 113). Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: • Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed mode. • Unlock the doors with the remote control or keyless entry keypad. If equipped with intelligent access, you can use the unlock sensor on the exterior door handle. See Locking and Unlocking (page 67). • Switch the ignition on or start your vehicle. • Use a key in the driver door lock cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then switch the ignition on within 12 seconds. Reduced Guard (If Equipped) Reduced guard monitors the following: • Doors. • Hood. Full Guard (If Equipped) Full guard monitors the following: • Doors. • Hood. • Movement inside your vehicle. • Change in vehicle inclination, for example, unwanted towing. Note: Do not choose full monitor mode when the vehicle is in transport or if movement within the vehicle is likely to occur. Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control stops the horn and direction indicators, but does not disarm the system. Note: For correct operation of the interior motion detection system, make sure you close all the windows prior to arming the system. This helps prevent accidental alarm activation due to external influences. Additionally, the interior motion sensing system does not arm if any door is ajar. Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle using the remote control or keyless entry keypad. You can also lock your vehicle using the lock sensor on the exterior door handle if your vehicle is equipped with intelligent access. See Locking and Unlocking (page 67). 79 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Power Running Boards (If Equipped) Automatic Power Deploy USING POWER RUNNING BOARDS WARNINGS In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Make sure that the running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared. Switch off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under your vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board and your vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury. E166682 The running boards automatically extend down and out when you open the door. This can help you enter and exit your vehicle. Automatic Power Stow Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies, running board motors, or the running board underbody mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking. Always use proper jacking points. When you close the doors, the running boards return to the stowed position after a two-second delay. Manual Power Deploy Note: The running boards may operate more slowly in cool temperatures. You can manually operate the running boards in the information display. Note: The running board mechanism may trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this happens, manually set the running boards to the deployed position. Then, wash the system, in particular the front and rear hinge arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select Settings. Select Advanced Settings. Select Vehicle. Select Power Running Boards. Select your desired power running board setting. Set the running boards in the deployed position to access the roof. The running boards return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). 80 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Power Running Boards (If Equipped) Enabling and Disabling You can enable and disable the power running board feature in the information display. • • When disabled, the running boards move to the stowed position regardless of the door position. When enabled, the running boards move back to the correct positions based on the door position. Bounce-back The running board will reverse direction and move to the end of travel if it encounters an object while moving. 81 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 154). E261503 3. Lock the steering column. ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: POWER ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. E261502 Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 154). 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 82 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Steering Wheel Note: The steering column may begin to move again. 4. When the steering column stops, continue holding the control for a few seconds. 5. Repeat for each direction as necessary. A new stopping position sets. The next time you tilt or telescope the steering column, it stops just short of the end of the column position. Memory Feature You can save and recall the steering column position with the memory function. See Memory Function (page 159). E261582 Pressing the adjustment control during a memory recall cancels the operation. Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position. Easy Entry and Exit Feature To adjust: • Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the control. • Telescope: Press the front or rear of the control. The column moves up when you switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See Information Displays (page 113). End of Travel Position Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column may move up and in. The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column. A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping. AUDIO CONTROL You can operate the following functions with the control: To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position: 1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the motion of the steering column. 2. Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving. 3. Press the steering column control again. 83 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped) E191327 A Volume up. B Media. C Seek up or next. D Volume down. E Seek down or previous. E191328 Media A Mute. B Voice recognition. C End call. D Answer or make a call. See your SYNC information. Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes. CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped) Seek, Next or Previous Type One Press the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • Seek through a track. E191329 See Using Cruise Control (page 243). 84 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Steering Wheel Type Two Note: You can use the heated steering wheel only when the engine is running. Note: The system uses a sensor and is designed to control the temperature of the steering wheel and to prevent it from overheating. Note: In warm temperatures, the steering wheel quickly reaches its maximum temperature and the system reduces the current to the heating element. This could cause you to think that the system has stopped working but it has not. This is normal. E191337 See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E191336 See Information Displays (page 113). HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped) Switch the heated steering wheel on and off using the touchscreen. Touch the button to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. 85 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Pedals (If Equipped) Horizontal Control ADJUSTING THE PEDALS WARNING Never use the pedal adjustment controls when your feet are on the accelerator or brake pedal when the vehicle is moving. Note: Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in park (P). A Depending on your vehicle and equipment level, the shape and location of your power-adjustable pedal control can vary. • • B E162916 If your control is vertical, then it is to the left of the steering column and on the instrument panel. If your control is horizontal, then it is on the left side of the steering column. A. Farther. B. Closer. Both horizontal and vertical controls operate the same way: 1. Press and hold A to move the pedals away from you. 2. Press and hold B to move the pedals closer to you. Vertical Control You can save and recall the pedal positions with the memory feature. See Memory Function (page 159). E176213 A. Farther. B. Closer. 86 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on after using the windshield washers to remove any excess washer fluid and debris. You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings in the instrument display. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. E172817 E172816 • • Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield. Rotate away from you for a long wipe interval. Rotate toward you for a short wipe interval. Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped) Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. 87 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wipers and Washers In these conditions, you can do the following: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. • Switch autowipers off. WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield. Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. E172818 • • • A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid. A brief press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid. A long press and hold turns on the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds. A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. 88 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in the Exterior Front Lamps and Rear Lamps Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 A Off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and rear lamps. C Headlamps. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Headlamp High Beam Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E167827 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 89 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Headlamp Flasher The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you cannot switch the high beams on until the system turns the low beams on. Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps When you switch the autolamps on, the headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of switching the wipers on. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. E163268 Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. The headlamps do not turn on with the wipers: • During a single wipe. • When using the windshield washers. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped) WARNING The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog. Note: If you switch the autolamps and the autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note: When disconnecting the battery or when it runs out of charge, the illuminated components turn to the maximum setting. E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps turn on in low light situations, or when the wipers turn on. 90 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS WARNING The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable) The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. Switching the ignition on. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions. 4. The headlamps are off. E231828 Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level. Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps A B Type Two - Configurable Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 113). The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The lamps are on in the information display. 2. Switching the ignition on. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off. E165366 A Press repeatedly or press and hold to dim. B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten. The other lighting control switch positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps. 91 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting If the daytime running lamps are off in the information display, the lamps stay off in all switch positions. Once the system is active, the high beams turn on if: • The ambient light level is low enough. • There is no traffic in front of your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (51 km/h). AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNING The high beams turn off if: • The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required. • The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps. • The vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h). • The system detects severe rain, snow or fog. • The camera is blocked. The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off. The system turns on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns off high beams before they can distract other road users. Low beams remain on. Switching the System On and Off Switch the system on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 113). Note: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction or damage. Note: The system may not operate properly in cold or inclement conditions. You can switch on the high beams by overriding the system. Note: If the system detects a blockage, for example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice, the system goes into low beam mode until you clear the blockage. A message may appear in the information display if the camera is blocked. E142451 Note: Using much larger tires or equipping vehicle accessories such as snowplows can modify your vehicle's ride height and degrade automatic high beam control performance. Switch the lighting control to the autolamps position. See Autolamps (page 90). Overriding the System A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off. When you switch on the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk provides a temporary override to low beam. 92 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Automatic High Beam Indicator (If • Equipped) • The indicator lamp illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist. To operate the left direction indicator, push the lever down until it stops. To operate the right direction indicator, push the lever up until it stops. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times. FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped) The spot lamps are on the forward-facing side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the spot lamps by pressing the buttons above the lighting control with the parking lamps on. E142453 Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Off and the high beams are not on. E176842 When switching on the spot lamps, the area in front of and to the side of your vehicle illuminates. DIRECTION INDICATORS Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by moving the position of the exterior mirrors. For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors into or away from the windows. For power-folding mirrors, use the switch on the driver-side door. Note: The spot lamps turn off when you reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). E163272 93 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps INTERIOR LAMPS (If Equipped) The lamps turn on under the following conditions: • You open any door. • You press a remote control button. The cargo lamps are in the central high mounted stop lamp, and to either side of the cargo box. The trailer hookup lamp is on the tailgate next to the handle. Front Interior Lamps Pressing the button in the lighting control panel or the E189587 button in the cargo box near the lamp turns on both of these lamps. Note: The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console. The exact location of each button on the overhead console depends upon your vehicle features. Note: Press the button to switch the door function off when you open any door. When the door function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps stay off. The indicator lamp lights amber when the door function is off. Note: Press the button again to switch the door function back on. When the door function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps turn on. The indicator lamp lights blue when the door function is on. E190880 If you switch on the cargo lamps, the cargo and trailer hitch area illuminate. Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually to off. 94 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Type One C B Type Two A C D A B E192153 E199032 A. Door function. A. All lamps on. B. C. All lamps on. B. Door function. Map lamps. C. All lamps off. D. Map lamps. 95 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing C D Lighting Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped) Type Three Type One E182517 A. Individual lamp. B. Individual lamp. Type Two A B C D E201073 A. Map lamp. B. Door function. C. All lamps off. D. Map lamp. E187343 Type Three E187342 A. All lamps on. B. Door function. E187345 96 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lighting Press the button to switch the lamps on or off. AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped) Adjust the ambient lighting using the touchscreen. See your SYNC information. CARGO LAMPS E189587 Press the button in the lighting control panel or in the rear cargo box to switch on the lamps. E190880 The cargo lamps are in the following areas: • Either side of the cargo box. • Next to the tailgate handle. Note: The cargo lamps turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually to off. 97 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Restoring the One-Touch Up Function POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped) You may lose the one-touch function if the vehicle battery is low. WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. To reset the function after the battery recharges: 1. Pull the switch all the way up. 2. Hold the switch until the glass stops and continue to hold for two seconds. 3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down position. One-touch up will now be functional. Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed. Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously bounce back. When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will automatically stop and reverse some distance if it detects an obstacle while closing. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING E176215 When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Press the control to open the window. Lift the control to close the window. Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no bounce-back protection. The window will stop if you release the switch before the window closes fully. One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped) Press or lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. Note: The window may disable for up to five minutes if you cycle it up and down repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to the motor. Normal operation will resume once the motor cools. 98 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Window Lock (If Equipped) EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. E176216 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. Accessory Delay (If Equipped) The window switches remain operational for several minutes when you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. E144073 GLOBAL OPENING (If Equipped) A Left-hand mirror. B Adjustment control. You can use the remote control to open the windows with the ignition off. C Right-hand mirror. To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle on, with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running, and then: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control lights. 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off. Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active. Opening the Windows You can only open the windows for a short time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to open the windows. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. 99 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Telescoping Mirrors This feature lets you extend the mirror about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when towing a trailer. You can manually pull out or push in the mirrors to the desired position. E234001 PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped) Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway through their movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving and press the control again. E234002 Power Telescoping Mirrors Note: The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move at different rates. For example, one mirror may stop while the other one continues to move. This is normal. This feature lets you position both mirrors at the same time. Power-Folding Mirrors To fold both mirrors: 1. Press the control. 2. Press control again to unfold the mirrors. E218902 100 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing A Extend. B Retract. Windows and Mirrors Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) To adjust your mirrors, press the adjustment control to position the mirrors. While the vehicle is running, the forward-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you switch on the direction indicator. Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or repeated folding, unfolding and telescoping of the mirrors while holding the control down during full travel, may disable the system to protect the motors from overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal. Puddle Lamps (If Equipped) The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror housing light when you use your transmitter to unlock the doors or when you open a door. Loose Mirror Clearance Lamps If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work properly even after you re-position them. You need to reset them if: • The mirrors vibrate when you drive. • The mirrors feel loose. • The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position. • One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position. The lower, outer part of the mirror housings light when you switch the headlamps or parking lamps on. (If Equipped) Spot Lamps (If Equipped) The area lights are on the forward-facing portion of the mirror housing. You can switch them on and off by using the controls located on the instrument panel. See Lighting (page 89). To reset the power-fold feature, use the power-folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this process as needed each time the mirrors are manually folded. Trailer Towing Camera System (If Heated Exterior Mirrors See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Equipped) See Rear View Camera (page 236). Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) (If Equipped) See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 152). Memory Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR (If Equipped) You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function. See Memory Function (page 159). Manual Dimming Mirror WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. 101 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. E176217 The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. It returns to normal when the bright light from behind is no longer present or if you shift into reverse (R). The control is on the overhead console. Press and hold the control to open the window. Pull and hold the control to close the window. Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. SUN VISORS Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint could prevent light from reaching the sensor. SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped) Power Sliding Back Window (If Equipped) WARNINGS When operating the power sliding back window, you must make sure all rear seat occupants and cargo are not in the proximity of the back window. E138666 Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power sliding back window. They may seriously injure themselves. 102 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Opening and Closing the Moonroof Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) E162197 E191272 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. MOONROOF (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the moonroof. They may seriously injure themselves. A Moonroof open. B Moonroof vent. C Sunshade open. D Sunshade close. E Moonroof close. Moonroof Open Press and release to open the moonroof. When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening. Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully opened position to reduce wind noise or rumbling that may happen with the moonroof fully open. Press and release the control again to open the moonroof fully. The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its movement during one-touch operation, press the control a second time. Moonroof Vent Press and release to vent the moonroof. Sunshade Open Press and release to open the sunshade. The sunshade opens automatically with the moonroof. You can also open the sunshade with the moonroof closed. Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully opened position for the comfort of rear passengers. To open the sunshade fully, press the control again. 103 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Windows and Mirrors Sunshade Close Press and release to close the sunshade. Moonroof Close Press and release to close the moonroof from either the open or vent positions. Bounce-Back The moonroof automatically reverses some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing. To override this feature, press and hold (E) within two seconds after the roof comes to a stop following a bounce-back reversal. 104 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 and 2 E219638 A Engine oil pressure gauge. E Speedometer. B Engine coolant temperature gauge. F C Fuel gauge. Information display. See General Information (page 113). D Transmission fluid temperature gauge. G Tachometer. 105 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Type 3 E219651 A Engine oil pressure gauge. B Engine coolant temperature gauge. C Fuel gauge. D Configurable. Transmission fluid temperature, Turbo boost or DEF gauge (diesel engines only). E Speedometer. F Information display. See General Information (page 113). G Tachometer. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal operating range (between L and H). If the needle falls below the normal range, stop your vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. 106 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs service soon. WARNING Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. After refueling some variability in needle position is normal: • • Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. • It may take a short time for the needle to reach F after leaving the gas station. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station. If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different gas pump nozzle. Low Fuel Reminder Fuel Gauge A low fuel reminder triggers when the distance to empty value reaches 50 mi (80 km) to empty, with additional warnings at 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) to empty, provided the message is cleared each time. An additional warning at 75 mi (120 km) to empty is provided when the MyKey is being used. Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient. Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Variations: Note: The distance-to-empty warning can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. Driving type (fuel economy conditions) Distance-to-empty Fuel gauge position Highway driving 50 mi (80 km) 1/8th tank Severe duty driving (trailer towing, extended idle) 50 mi (80 km) 1/4 tank 107 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and operate the same as a warning lamp but do not illuminate when you start your vehicle. Indicates transmission fluid temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the transmission fluid temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill. Also, higher than normal operating temperature can be caused by special operation conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or off-road use). Operating the transmission for extended periods with the gauge in the higher than normal area may cause internal transmission damage. You need to alter the severity of your driving conditions to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see an authorized dealer. Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) The speed control system indicator light changes color to E144524 indicate what mode the system is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). On (white light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off. Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged. Adaptive Steering (If Equipped) Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped) The adaptive steering system indicator illuminates if the E223375 system detects a fault during the continuous diagnostic checks. Indicates the amount of manifold air pressure in the engine. DEF Gauge (If Equipped) Adaptive Steering Initialization (yellow, flashing): The adaptive steering system has detected a difference between steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this difference. This adjustment is part of normal system operation. Indicates the current DEF level. WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Adaptive Steering Off (yellow, solid): The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the steering wheel may not be straight when the vehicle is driving straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized dealer. 108 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Brake System Adaptive Steering Loss (red, solid): The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer immediately. See Steering (page 259). WARNING Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. Anti-Lock Braking System It illuminates momentarily when you switch on the ignition to confirm that the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch on the ignition or begins to flash at anytime, have the system checked as soon as possible. It illuminates momentarily when you switch on the ignition to confirm that the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch on the ignition or begins to flash at anytime, have the system checked as soon as possible. If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked as soon as possible. E144522 Illuminates when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on. Automatic High Beam (If Equipped) If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked as soon as possible. Illuminates when this feature is on. See Automatic High Beam Control (page 92). Battery If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) It illuminates when you switch this feature off or in conjunction with a message. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). E151262 Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped) Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed. Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service engine soon warning indicator to come on. 109 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Fasten Seatbelt Cruise Control (If Equipped) E71340 Illuminates when you switch this feature on. See Using Cruise Control (page 243). E71880 It illuminates and a chime sounds to remind you to fasten your seatbelt. Direction Indicator Front Airbag Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. If it fails to illuminate when you start your vehicle, continues to E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer. Door Ajar Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped) Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed. It illuminates when you switch the front fog lamps on. High Beam Electronic Locking Differential (If Illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher. Equipped) Illuminates when using the electronic locking differential. E163170 Hill Descent (If Equipped) Engine Coolant Temperature Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Illuminates when hill descent is switched on. E163171 Low Fuel Level Engine Oil Illuminates when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. possible. Low Tire Pressure Warning It illuminates if the tire pressure in one or more tires is below the correct tire pressure. See Engine Oil Check (page 333). Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. 110 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster Stability Control It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by your authorized dealer. Illuminates when the system is active. If it remains illuminated E138639 or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system will switch off. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 231). Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle Control Illuminates when a powertrain or a 4WD fault has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Stability Control Off Illuminates when you switch the system off. It will go out when E130458 you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. Service Engine Soon If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. The On Board Diagnostics system has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system. See Using Stability Control (page 231). Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped) Illuminates when the tow/haul feature has been activated. If the E161509 light flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur. If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle immediately serviced. 4X2 (If Equipped) Illuminates momentarily when two-wheel drive high is selected. E163173 If the light fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. It illuminates when you switch the ignition on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, it illuminates until the engine is cranked and automatically turns off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this indicates that your vehicle is not ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. See Emission Law (page 195). 4X4 LOW (If Equipped) Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. If the light E181780 fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. 111 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Instrument Cluster 4X4 HIGH (If Equipped) During refueling, it is possible for you to pump water-contaminated diesel fuel into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel system is equipped with a fuel filter and water separator to remove water from the fuel. The water in fuel indicator lights when the fuel and water separator has a significant quantity of water in it and requires immediate draining. Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. If the light E181779 fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. Diesel Engine Brake (If Equipped) E171217 If the water in fuel indicator illuminates when the engine is running, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off the engine, then drain the fuel and water separator. See Fuel Quality (page 187). Allowing water to stay in the fuel system, after the water in fuel indicator illuminates, could result in extensive damage or failure of the fuel injection system. Illuminates when you switch the manual engine brake on. See General Information (page 225). E234452 Illuminates when you switch the automatic engine brake on. See General Information (page 225). Note: Do not drain the fuel and water separator while the engine is running. Air will enter into the fuel system causing the engine not to operate properly. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped) With the key in the on position, illuminates when the DEF is E163176 contaminated, low or someone has tampered with the DEF system. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Headlamps On Warning Chime Wait To Start (If Equipped) Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Illuminates when you switch the ignition on as part of the pre-start system. Wait until the wait to start indicator turns off before attempting to start vehicle. See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 178). Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition. Water In Fuel (If Equipped) Parking Brake On Warning Chime WARNING Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drain the water-in-fuel separator while the engine is running. Failure to follow this warning may result in fire, serious injury, death or property damage. 112 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 1 and 2) (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). • Note: Some MyKey menu options only appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one MyKey is programmed. • E219650 This icon gives you the ability to switch a feature on or off. A E204495 check in the box indicates the feature is enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature is disabled. • • 113 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting or messages. Information Displays Type 1 Main Menu Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Driver Assist Settings Trip 1 Digital Speed Trip Odometer Trip Timer DTE Average Fuel Outside Temp • • • • • • Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual trips. Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual trips. DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Outside Air - Shows the outside air temperature. Note: Press and hold OK to reset values. Note: Trip 2 information is the same as Trip 1. 114 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Fuel Economy Distance to E Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy • • • • Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage. Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Average Speed - Shows the average speed the vehicle has driven. Note: Press and hold OK to reset values. Driver Assist DEF Gauge DEF Status Exhaust Filter Engine Hours Engine Hours Engine Idle Dual Fuel Tank Front Tank Rear Tank Hill Strt Asst. Oil Temp Oil Temp Tire Pressure Trans. Temp. Rear Park Aid Tr Brake Type Select Your Setting Tr Brake Effort Trailer Sway 115 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Settings Vehicle A. Engine Off Auto Regen DTE Calculate Select Your Setting Lighting Autolamp Delay Select Your Setting Daytime Light Locks Autolock Autounlock Remote Unlock Select Your Setting Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings Alarm Select Your Setting Ask on Exit Remote Start Climate Control Select Your Setting Seats Duration System MyKey Windows Remote Open Wiper Controls Courtesy Wipe MyKey Status Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s). Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. 911 Assist Select Your Setting Do Not Disturb AdvanceTrac Max Speed Speed Minder 116 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Settings Vol. Limiter Clear MyKeys Display Setup Units Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Select Your Setting Temperature Language Tire Pressure Type 2 Main Menu Display Mode Trip/Fuel Towing Off Road Settings Display Mode DTE Dual Fuel Tanks DEF Gauge DEF Status Exhaust Filter Status Tire Pressure Digital Speedometer 117 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Display Mode Engine Information Transmission Temp. • • • • • • • • • DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the distance to empty for the front and rear tanks. DEF Gauge - Shows DEF gauge graphic. DEF Status - Shows DEF status on demand screen. Exhaust Filter - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen. Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi. Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature. Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value. Trip/Fuel Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Fuel History Compass Select Your Setting Average Speed Trip 1 or 2 • Shows the time, mileage and average fuel economy of an individual journey. Also shows DTE. Fuel • Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph, average mpg and DTE. • Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Also shows DTE. Note: Press and hold OK to reset values. Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle. 118 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Towing Provides trailer status information for the active trailer: Trailer Blind Spot status, Trailer Reverse Guidance status, trailer name, accumulated trailer miles, trailer brake gain and output. Trailer Status Trailer Status Trailer Light Check Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active trailer. Trailer Tire Pressure Displays the trailer tire pressure and options to customize the display. Trailer Options Trailer Sway Control Select Trailer Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer Reset Trailer Distance Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Change Blind Spot Measure Add Trailer Blind Spot Change Trailer Sticker Add Trailer Rev. Guidance Change Brake Type Select Your Setting Change Brake Effort Delete Trailer Change Trailer Setup Add Trailer Select Your Setting Add Trailer Trailer Brake Type Trailer Brake Effort 119 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Select Your Setting Information Displays Towing Change Trailer Setup Trailer Rev. Guidance Connection Checklist Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Conventional Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Off Road Off Road Status Displays pitch, steering angle and roll. Settings Auto Regen Blind Spot Cross Traffic Alert DTE Calculation Select Your Setting Rear Park Aid Trailer Blind Spot Advanced Settings Vehicle Auto Engine Off Easy Entry/Exit Lighting Autolamp Delay Select Your Setting Daytime Lights Locks Autolock Autounlock Remote Unlock 120 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Select Your Setting Information Displays Settings Remote Start Climate Control Seats Duration System Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Alarm Select Your Setting Ask on Exit Windows Remote Open Remote Close Wiper Controls MyKey Courtesy Wipe Rain Sensing MyKey Status Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. 911 Assist Select Your Setting Do Not Disturb AdvanceTrac Max Speed Speed Minder Volume Limiter Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Display Setup Units Select Your Setting Temperature Tire Pressure Language 121 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 3) (If Equipped) • • • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting or messages. E219639 Type 3 Main Menu MyView Trip/Fuel Truck Info Towing Off Road Settings 122 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays MyView Trip 1 Fuel Economy Tire Pressure Off Road Status Configure MyView Add/Remove Screens Trip/Fuel Screens Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Fuel History Average Speed Navigation/Compass Truck Info Screens Turbo Boost Transmission Temp Trans. Temp. Gauge Diesel Particulate Filter Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge View Tire Pressure Digital Speedometer Engine Information MyKey Status Towing Screens Towing Status Towing Information Trailer Light Check Off Road Screens 123 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Off Road Status Information Displays MyView Reorder Screens Screen Selection 1 -7 Up/Down moves selection in the list Press OK to select • • • • Trip 1/2 - Shows your trip timer, fuel used, trip odometer and average mpg. Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage and average mpg. Tire Pressure - Shows your car outline with tire pressure values. Off Road Status - Shows your pitch and roll screen. Trip/Fuel Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Fuel History Navigation/Compass Compass Select Your Setting Trip 1 or 2 • Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys. • DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. • Odo - Registers the mileage of individual journeys. • Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Fuel • Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average mpg. • Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Navigation/Compass • Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in Navigation is not set). 124 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Truck Info Turbo Boost Gauge Gauge View Transmission Temperature Gauge Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge Tire Pressure Digital Speedometer Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status Diesel Particulate Filter Status Dual Fuel Tanks Engine Information Transmission Temperature • • • • • • • • • • Turbo Boost Gauge - Shows the turbo boost gauge. Transmission Temperature Gauge - Shows the transmission temperature gauge. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Gauge - Shows diesel exhaust fluid gauge. Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure in psi. Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status - Shows the diesel exhaust fluid status. Diesel Particulate Filter Status - Shows the diesel particulate filter status. Dual Fuel Tanks - Shows the front and rear fuel tank gauges. Engine Information - Shows engine hours, engine idle hours and oil temperature. Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature value. Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle. 125 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Towing Towing Status % Grade, steering angle, gain and output display Towing Information Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Trailer Reverse Guidance Status, Trailer BLIS Status and Trailer Disconnected Trailer Light Check Provides status of the brake, park and direction indicator light for the active trailer. Trailer Tire Pressure Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Trailer Setup Trailer Sway Control Select trailer Select Your Trailer Change Trailer Settings Rename Trailer Reset Trailer Distance Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Change Blind Spot Measurement Add Blind Spot Change Reverse Guidance Sticker Add Trailer Reverse Guidance™ Change Brake Type Change Brake Effort Delete Trailer Change Trailer Setup Add Trailer Trailer Brake Type Select Your Setting Trailer Brake Effort Trailer Setup 126 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Information Displays Towing ConnecConventional tion CheckFifth Wheel list Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Gooseneck Off Road Off Road Status Displays pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4. Settings Auto Highbeam Auto Regen Blind Spot Cross Traffic Alert Driver Alert Rear Park Aid Trailer Blind Spot Pre-Collision Alert Sensitivity Select Your Setting Pre-Collision - On Cruise Control Select Your Setting DTE Calculation Gauge Selection Lane Keeping System Mode Select Your Setting Sensitivity Alert Intensity 127 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Settings Advanced Settings Vehicle Auto Engine Off Easy Entry/Exit Lighting Autolamp Delay Select Your Setting Daytime Lights Locks Autolock Autounlock Remote Unlock Select Your Setting Oil Life Reset Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Alarm Select Your Setting Ask on Exit Power Running Boards Select Your Setting Remote Start Climate Control Front Seats & Wheel Select Your Setting Duration System Windows Remote Open Wiper Controls Courtesy Wipe Rain Sensing MyKey MyKey Status Shows information related to the configured MyKey(s) Create MyKey Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. 911 Assist Select Your Setting Do Not Disturb AdvanceTrac 128 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Settings Max Speed Speed Minder Volume Limiter Clear MyKeys Follow onscreen directions to confirm or modify your settings. Display Setup Units Select Your Setting Temperature Tire Pressure Language INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all of the messages will display or be available. The information display may abbreviate or shorten certain messages. E184451 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. The information display will automatically remove other messages after a short time. You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus. Active Park Message Action Active Park Fault The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 129 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Adaptive Cruise Control Message Action Adaptive Cruise Malfunction A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Cruise Control (page 243). Adaptive Cruise Not Available A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Cruise Control (page 243). Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Cruise Control (page 243). Normal Cruise Active Adaptive Braking Off The system has disabled the automatic braking. Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver. Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to Activate Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise. Adaptive Cruise Shift Down The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower gear. Adaptive Steering Message Action Adaptive Steering Initialization The adaptive steering system has detected a difference between steering wheel angle and the desired road wheel angle. The steering wheel adjusts itself to correct this difference. This adjustment is part of normal system operation. Adaptive Steering Fault The adaptive steering system is off. It is possible that the Service Required steering wheel may not be straight when the vehicle is driving straight ahead. If this message persists, see an authorized dealer. Adaptive Steering Loss Do Not Drive The adaptive steering system integrity cannot be verified. Do not drive the vehicle and contact an authorized dealer immediately. 130 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays AdvanceTrac and Traction Control Message Action Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it off. AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it on. AdvanceTrac SPORT MODE The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched it on. Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched it off. See Using Traction Control (page 229). Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched it on. See Using Traction Control (page 229). Airbag Message Action Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove Objects Near Passenger Seat Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Alarm and Security Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 78). 131 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Automatic Engine Shutdown Message Action Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0} Seconds The engine is getting ready to shut off. Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy. Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0} Seconds Press Ok to Override The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut down. Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal. Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery. 132 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Cross Traffic System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message ated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). Trailer Blind Spot Not available Due to Invalid Trailer Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or gooseneck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or longer than 33 ft (10 m). 133 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Collision Warning System Message Action Collision Warning Malfunction A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Collision Warning Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Driving Aids (page 250). Collision Warning Not Available A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Diesel Messages WARNING When the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message appears in the information display, do not park near flammable materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete. Message Action Exhaust Filter Cleaning Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust temperature will return to normal levels. This message is NORMAL. Exhaust Filter Overloaded Drive to Clean The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off. Exhaust Filter Overloaded Clean Now Exhaust Filter at Limit Clean Now Exhaust Filter at Limit Drive to Clean Now The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off. 134 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Message Action Exhaust System Overheated Stop Safely NOW Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Engine Warming Please In extremely cold weather, typically below -15°F (-26°C) and Wait {seconds:00} sec if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly in order to avoid engine damage. Exhaust Filter Drive Complete Your diesel particulate filter is clean. Exhaust Filter Cleaned Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only). Exhaust Filter Cleaning Stopped The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only). DEF Level Range: XX mi/ km Refill Now The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining diesel exhaust fluid. DEF Level Empty Speed Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top Limited to XX MPH / km/ speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must h in XX mi/km replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). DEF Level Empty Speed Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel Limited to XX MPH/km/ h Upon Restart exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). DEF Level Empty Speed The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the Limited to XX MPH/km/ diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your h vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). DEF Level Empty Engine The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust Idled Soon fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). 135 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Message Action DEF Level Empty Engine A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system. Idled See Manual The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The to XX MPH/km/h in XX vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed mi/km distance and count down from this point. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The to XX MPH/km/h Upon vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have Restart the system checked by an authorized dealer. DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The to XX MPH/km/h vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Exhaust Filter Over Limit You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. Service Now Ignoring the Exhaust Filter Over Limit Service Now warning message could lead to reduced drivability and customer expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage. Water in Fuel Drain Filter The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 351). Fuel Pressure Low A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality (page 187). Doors and Locks Message Action X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed. 136 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Driver Alert Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon. Drivetrain Message Action To Engage Locking Differential Slow to XX mph/km/h The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed requirement to engage. To Engage Locking Differential Release Accelerator Pedal The electronic locking differential requests the accelerator to be released in order to engage. Check Locking Differential An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Engine Message Action Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature. 137 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Fuel Message Action Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle. No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 176). Restart Now or Key is Needed You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key inside your vehicle. Full Accessory Power Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state. Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service. Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system. Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system. Max Number of Keys Learned You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system. Not Enough Keys Learned You have not programmed enough keys to the system. Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on. 138 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer tion Service Required as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering Wheel wheel. Maintenance Message Action Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter (page 335). Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%. See Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter (page 335). Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 349). Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Transport / Factory Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer. See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction. 139 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays MyKey Message Action MyKey not Created You did not program a MyKey. MyKey Active Drive Safely MyKey is active. Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on. Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h). Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey. Check Speed Drive Safely You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit. Buckle Up to Unmute Audio Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use. AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on. Traction Control On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on. MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on. Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on. Off Road Message Action Hill Descent Control Active Hill descent control mode is active. Hill Descent Control OFF Hill descent control mode is inactive. For Hill Descent Reduce Speed XX MPH/km/h or Less Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met. For Hill Descent Select Gear You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent mode. 140 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Message Action Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must resume control. Hill Descent Control Fault A hill descent system fault is present. Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse. Hill Descent Control Ready The hill descent control system is ready. Park Aid Message Action Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 235). Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 235). Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Park Brake Message Action To Release: Press Brake and Switch The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed. Park Brake Use Switch to Release The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual release. Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving. Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied. Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released. 141 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Message Action Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Limited Function Service Required The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Power Steering Message Action Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer. Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now The steering lock system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer. Remote Start Message Action To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift Button A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button to drive your vehicle after a remote start. Seats Message Action Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving. Permitted While Driving Memory {0} Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting. 142 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Starting System Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle . Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle. Engine Start Pending Please Wait The starter is attempting to start your vehicle. Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Trailer Message Action Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} The current gain setting for the trailer brake. Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} No Trailer The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not connected. Trailer Brake Module Fault Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a Trailer (page 272). Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle. 143 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays Message Action Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 272). Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp. Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp. Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer (page 272). Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See Towing a Trailer (page 272). Trailer Tire Low Specified: One or more tires on your trailer is below the specified tire pressure. Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A trailer tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor Capability Not Detected The system cannot detect the trailer tire pressure monitoring system. Trailer Tire Pressure Indication Not Setup See Manual The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not setup. See General Information (page 113). 144 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Information Displays 4WD Message Action Check 4x4 A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift. For 4x4 LOW Shift to N When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW. For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH When your vehicle is moving and you need to reduce your speed to select 4X4 LOW. To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in 4X4 LOW and you need to shift into Neutral. To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW and you need to reduce your speed. Shift Delayed Pull Forward May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral state. 4x4 Temporarily Disabled The 4X4 system is temporarily disabled, and the overall powertrain output response is reduced. The 4X4 system and powertrain response will be automatically restored after the 4X4 system has had the opportunity to cool down. 4x4 Restored The 4X4 system has been restored to its original setting. 4x4 Temporarily Locked The 4X4 system is temporarily locked for added driveline protection and has automatically switched to 4H setting. 145 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) E217902 A Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. B Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. C Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents. D Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Note: At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on. 146 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control E Temperature control: Adjusts the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. F MAX Defrost: Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air flows through the windshield vents and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. H Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. G A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. I Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 162). J Heated exterior mirrors: Press to switch the heated exterior mirrors on and off. MAX A/C: Turn to the left for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) 147 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control E217905 A B Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air adjust to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds. MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. The driver and passenger settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield vents, and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. 148 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. D Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield, instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents. E Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Climate Control Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. F G H I MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. The driver and passenger settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. DUAL: Press to switch on temperature control for the passenger side of the vehicle. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same as the driver settings. Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 163). L Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. M Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Rear Window (page 152). N Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the passenger side. General Hints A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. J K Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 162). Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. 149 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control Manual Climate Control Note: If you select AUTO during cold temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Note: If you select AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Fan speed may also reduce until the air cools. Automatic Climate Control Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Quickly Heating the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the full heat setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. Recommended Settings for Heating Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. 150 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control Quickly Cooling the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C. 2 Drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Recommended Settings for Cooling Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the instrument panel using the air distribution buttons. Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button. distribution buttons. 2 Press A/C. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 151 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. HEATED REAR WINDOW (If Equipped) Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The E184884 heated rear window turns off after a short period of time. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Note: Make sure the engine is on before operating the heated windows. For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle Warranty may not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. REMOTE START (If Equipped) You can switch this feature on or off and adjust the settings using the information display. HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS The system adjusts the interior temperature depending on your chosen settings during remote start. When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. You cannot adjust the climate control setting during remote start operation. When you switch the ignition on, the climate control system returns to the previous settings. You can now make adjustments. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. You need to switch on certain vehicle-dependent features, such as: • Heated seats. • Cooled seats. • Heated steering wheel. • Heated mirrors. • Heated rear window. CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. Automatic Settings In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F (22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if available, and AUTO is on in the information display). You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box. 152 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Climate Control In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not turn on. In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if available, and AUTO is on in the information display). The heated rear window and heated mirrors turn on. 153 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNINGS Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash. Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. An improperly adjusted head restraint may not adequately protect an occupant during an impact from the rear. 154 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats The head restraints may consist of: WARNINGS Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. E Fold button. Adjusting the Head Restraint Front Seat Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Pull the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold buttons C and D. 2. Pull the head restraint up. E138642 Installing the Head Restraint Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. A Folding the Head Restraint B Note: The rear seat outboard head restraints may fold forward for improved visibility. E C 1. Press and hold button E. 2. Pull it back up to reset. E166700 D Front Row Center and Rear Seat Center (Crew Cab) Head Restraints Note: The SuperCab has rear outboard head restraints that are not removable and are bolted to the back wall. 155 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Your vehicle may be equipped with head restraints that are non-adjustable. The non-adjustable head restraints consist of: A B C E162872 E144727 A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. 1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted position. Removing the Head Restraint Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position. 1. Press and hold buttons C. 2. Pull up the head restraint. Installing the Head Restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped) Do not adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: 156 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Moving the Seat Backward and Forward Manual Lumbar (If Equipped) E166702 E175314 The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Turn the control to adjust your support. Recline Adjustment POWER SEATS (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle. Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. E175315 157 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats E176038 Note: The engine must be running or the vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate the seats. Power Lumbar (If Equipped) Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection to activate. When the seatback and cushion are both active, the massage will alternate between zones E176039 Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped) Note: The massage system turns off after 20 minutes. E156301 158 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Massage mode Lumbar and bolster mode A Back massage intensity adjustment Upper lumbar B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease * and off C Cushion massage intensity adjustment Lower lumbar D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase E On and off - ** * The massage feature defaults to an alternating massage mode with back massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar and bolster feature defaults to the middle lumbar mode. MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped) WARNINGS Before activating the memory seat, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts. ** Press C a second time to adjust the back bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the cushion bolster. You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen. When switched on, the system displays directions for you to adjust the lumbar settings in your seat or to set the massage function. To access and make adjustments to the lumbar setting: Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving. This feature automatically recalls the position of the following: 1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle > Multi-contour Seat. 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar intensity. • • • Driver seat. Power mirrors. Optional adjustable pedals. The memory control is on the driver door. To access and make adjustments to the massage setting: 1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle >Multi-contour Seat. 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press Off, Low or High. 159 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Note: Pressing any active memory feature control - power seat, mirror (or any memory button) during a memory recall cancels the operation. Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob Your vehicle can save the preset memory positions for up to two remote controls. 1. With the ignition on, move the memory positions to the positions you desire. 2. Press and hold the desired preset button for about five seconds. A tone sounds after about two seconds. Continue holding until you hear a second tone. 3. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking. E142554 Saving a Preset Position 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Adjust the features to the positions you desire. 3. Press and hold the preset button until you hear a single tone. Note: You can save up to three preset memory positions. To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure – except in step 3, press the unlock button on the remote control. Note: You can save a memory preset at any time. Note: If more than one linked remote control or intelligent access key is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to initiate a memory recall. Recalling a Preset Position 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The seat and mirrors move to the position stored for that preset. Note: You can only recall preset memory positions when you switch the ignition off, or when the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on. Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped) If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, it automatically moves the driver seat rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you put the transmission in park (P) and remove the key from the ignition. Note: You can also recall a preset memory position by pressing the unlock button on your remote control if it is linked to a preset position. The driver seat returns to the previous position when you put the key in the ignition. You can enable or disable this feature through the information display. See Information Displays (page 113). Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat to the easy entry position. 160 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Returning the Seat to the Seating Position REAR SEATS (If Equipped) Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion WARNING The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. You can flip each seat cushion up into a vertical storage position. Check under the seat cushion to make sure no cargo or objects are under the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury. E181250 Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks into the vertical storage position. Cushion Lock (If Equipped) The locking key is in the keyfob. See Remote Control (page 56). E166704 Pull the control on the bottom of the seat cushion to release it from the storage position. Rear Under Seat Storage (If Equipped) The rear seat has storage space under the seat cushion. E224956 Turn the key to lock or unlock. 161 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Use your vehicle key to lock the storage space. HEATED SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING E162739 People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. A Lift the lever and flip up the seat cushion to access the storage space and the power point (A). Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. E162740 To remove the storage space divider, squeeze the sides and lift it from the storage tub. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. E162741 162 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped) E146322 WARNING Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in the on position, press the heated seat switch to enable heating mode. When activated, they turn off automatically when you switch off the engine. CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If Equipped) Heated Seats WARNING Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must use caution when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that may block the heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This damages the heating element and can cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. The rear seat heat controls are on the rear of the center console. 163 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cool settings and off. More indicator lights indicate cooler settings. Note: The cooled seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the cooled seats switch off. Press the cooled seat symbol to switch the cooled seats on. Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter Replacement E146322 Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are integrated with the seats. Regular maintenance or replacement is not required. Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Equipped) Note: After 60 minutes of operation, the heated seats switch off. Press the heated seat symbol to switch the heated seats on. Cooled Seats Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. E223578 1. Press the control to release the cushion latch. 2. Lift the cushion to gain access to the storage compartment. E146309 164 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Seats The cupholder is located inside the storage compartment. You can also flip the cupholder so that it faces forward. See Center Console (page 172). Pull the strap located on the center seatback to access the armrest and cupholders. The cupholders are located inside the rear seat armrest. Cushion Lock To open the cupholders: The locking key is in the keyfob. Remove the cover of the keyfob to access the locking key. See Remote Control (page 56). 1. Push in gently on the center of the plastic panel at the front edge of the armrest. The cupholders will partially open. 2. Pull the cupholder fully open before using. E224738 Turn the key to lock or unlock. REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped) E181222 165 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNINGS Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage. Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. E188211 The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter integrated into the driver’s sun visor. The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. You can program garage doors as well as entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes later in this section. In-Vehicle Programming This process is to program your in-vehicle HomeLink function button with your hand-held transmitter. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. If your HomeLink was previously programmed, you may need to erase your HomeLink buttons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This helps ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 166 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press and hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the programming process. If your device still does not operate, you must program your garage door. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor. To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. E188212 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, switch your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Press and release the function button that you would like to program. 3. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. 4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button you want to program while watching the indicator light on HomeLink. Continue to hold the hand-held button until the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly or is continuously on. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener. E142659 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light. If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. 167 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) E188212 E188213 3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. 1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the indicator light above the buttons flashes rapidly. 2. When the indicator light flashes, release the buttons. You erased the codes for all buttons. Gate Operator / Canadian Programming Reprogramming a Single Button Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section. Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. 1. Press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes to a rapidly blinking or continuously on light. 2. Release the hand-held transmitter button. 3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4. Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. 168 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. 169 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations Note: Timed power points remain on for 30 minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode. If you switch the vehicle off, the timed power points remain on for 75 minutes. WARNING Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Power points may be in the following locations: • On the instrument panel. • Inside the center console. • On the rear of the center console. • In the seat bin. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 amps. 110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power Outlet Note: Do not plug in any device that supplies power to the vehicle through the power points, this may result in damage to vehicle systems. WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 400 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This damages the power point and may blow the fuse. Note: This feature works only when the engine is running. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. Note: This feature has a maximum output of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P). To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is off. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. Note: While in drive (D), the maximum outlet output is 300 watts. Note: When powering electric devices that require more than 10 watts in vehicles equipped with keyless start, the engine must remain running. If the engine is turned off or you switch the ignition to accessory mode, plugged in devices will not be charged. You can use the power point for electric devices that require up to 400 watts. It is on the instrument panel and rear of the center console. 170 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Auxiliary Power Points Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: • Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. • Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. • Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps. E191617 When the indicator light on the power point is: • On: The power point is working, the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. • Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. • Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. You can use the 400 watt power outlet for these types of electric devices: • Electric hand drills. • Rechargeable power tools. • Video games. • Laptops. • Televisions. Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is parked and 300W - when the vehicle is driving. 171 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped) OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped) Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. Available console features include: E224959 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. UNDER SEAT STORAGE Rear Under Seat Storage E250516 A Storage compartment. B Front storage compartment with USB ports. C Sliding cup holder. D Center storage compartment with auxiliary power point. E Rear cup holders. F AC power point. G Heated rear seats. H Auxiliary power point. I USB charging ports. E229819 1. 172 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Lift rear seat to access under seat storage bin. Storage Compartments E235007 E235008 2. Lift front and side panels to expand and lock them in place. 3. Lock the panels in an open position. E235009 173 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Storage Compartments 4. To collapse, lift lever and fold in the side and front panels. Note: Make sure the storage divider is not locked into place when collapsing. 174 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear all the snow and ice away from the air induction inlet. GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped) Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5.0 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. A (off) - The ignition is off. The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. B (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. E252522 Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. C (on) - All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. 175 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • D (start) - Cranks the engine. KEYLESS STARTING Note: The system may not function if the intelligent access key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE - 6.2L/6.8L Note: A valid intelligent access key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. Ignition Modes If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Before starting the engine check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Move the transmission selector lever to position P. • Turn the ignition key to the on position. E144447 The keyless starting system has three modes: Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Off: Turns the ignition off. • 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to the start position to start your vehicle. 3. When the engine starts, release the key and then gradually release the brake pedal as the engine speed increases. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when your vehicle is running but is not moving. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. • Press the brake pedal, and then press the button for any length of time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when the ignition is on and when your vehicle starts. Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short period and try again. Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once. Vehicles with an Ignition Key Start: Starts your vehicle. The engine may not start when your vehicle starts. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. 176 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fully depress the brake pedal. Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. Turn the key to position D to start the engine. 3. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds as starter damage may occur. If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and wait 30 seconds before trying again. Switching off the engine when your vehicle is still moving results in a significant decrease in braking assistance. Higher effort is required to apply the brakes and to stop your vehicle. A significant decrease in steering assistance could also occur. The steering does not lock, but higher effort could be required to steer your vehicle. When you switch the ignition off, some electrical circuits, for example airbags, also turn off. If you unintentionally switch the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and restart the engine. WARNING Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: If the push button ignition switch is pressed again prior to the engine starting the ignition will switch to accessory mode and will not start. Note: If the brake pedal is released before the engine has started, follow the engine start sequence again. 1. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the center of the push button ignition switch. 3. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 3. Apply the parking brake. Failure to Start Automatic Engine Shutdown If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, it has a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period of time. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 3. Start the engine. Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 2. Apply the parking brake. 177 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only) Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol. As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol, the same as with unleaded gasoline. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important Ventilating Information If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F (-18°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle or hesitation until the engine has warmed up. If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods of time, we recommend that you do one of the following: You may experience a decrease in performance when the engine is cold when operating on E85 ethanol. • • Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury. Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters). Set your climate control to outside air. STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE 6.7L DIESEL If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol, and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank improves cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two. Read all starting instructions carefully before you start your vehicle. For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the use of the correct grade engine oil is essential for proper operation. Refer to engine oil specifications for more information. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Your vehicle may have a cold weather starting strategy that prevents severe engine damage by assisting in engine lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold ambient temperatures, this strategy activates and prevents the accelerator pedal from being used for 30 seconds after you start your vehicle. A message appears in the information display as your vehicle warms up. By not allowing the accelerator pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed to properly lubricate the bearings If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only) 1. Press the accelerator pedal down one-third to one-half of its travel, and then crank the engine. 2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the accelerator pedal as the engine speed increases. If the engine still does not start, repeat Step 1. 178 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Vehicles with Keyless Start preventing engine damage due to lack of proper lubrication. After the 30 second warm-up period, the accelerator pedal will be operational again and a message appears informing you the vehicle is ok to drive. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: If the push button ignition switch is pressed again prior to the engine starting the ignition will switch to accessory mode and will not start. When you start the engine in extremely cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), we recommend that you allow the engine to idle for several minutes before you drive the vehicle. Note: If the brake pedal is released before the engine has started, follow the engine start sequence again. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the center of the push button ignition switch. Note: A message will appear Engine Start Pending, Please Wait. Before starting the engine check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their seatbelts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in park (P). 3. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug System Note: Do not press the accelerator during starting. The diesel engine glow system consists of: • • • • • Vehicles with an Ignition Key Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to position C Note: A message will appear Engine Start Pending, Please Wait. Eight glow plugs (one per cylinder) Glow Plug Control Module Engine Coolant Temperature sensor Barometric pressure sensor Environmental temperature sensor The powertrain and glow plug control modules electronically control the glow plug system. After you switch the ignition on, the glow plug control module immediately energizes the glow plugs. The glow plug control module uses the engine coolant temperature, barometric pressure sensor and environmental temperature sensor to determine how long the glow plugs stay energized. The required time for the glow plugs to be energized decreases as the coolant temperature, barometric pressure and environmental temperature increase. 3. Wait until the engine glow-plug indicator turns off. 4. Turn the key to position D to start the engine. 5. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds as starter damage may occur. If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and wait 30 seconds before trying again. 179 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Automatic Engine Shutdown When the glow plug pre-heat indicator turns off, turn the key to start. After you start the engine, the glow plugs may remain on for a period. If you do not start the engine before the glow plug activation time ends, you will need to reset the glow plugs by switching the ignition off. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for about 15 seconds. This protects the engine. Do not increase engine speed until the oil pressure gauge indicates normal pressure. If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, it has a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. Cold Weather Operation Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat the engine to its normal operating temperature. Long periods of idling, especially in cold weather, can cause a buildup of deposits which can cause engine damage. Cold Weather Starting WARNINGS Do not use starting fluid, for example ether, in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury. Change to a lighter grade engine oil to make starting easier under these conditions. Refer to engine oil specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Do not add gasoline, gasohol, alcohol or kerosene to diesel fuel. This creates a serious fire hazard and causes engine performance problems. Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not been properly formulated for the ambient conditions may gel which can clog the fuel filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s) may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls after a short time, and then does not restart. If you have been using biodiesel, you may need to use a fuel with lower biodiesel content, try another brand, or discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use alcohol based additives to correct fuel gelling. This may result in damage to the fuel injectors and system. Use the proper anti-gel and performance improvement product. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). We recommend that the engine block heater be used for starting when the temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See Engine Block Heater (page 183). When operating in cold weather, you may use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from a reputable manufacturer as needed. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine until the glow-plug indicator turns off. 180 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Your vehicle has a fuel and water separator that recirculates fuel from the engine to help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid engine fuel starvation during cold weather operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we recommend that the fuel level in your tank should not drop below ¼ full. This helps prevent air from entering the fuel system and stalling the engine. WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. In order to operate the engine in temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read the following instructions: • Make sure that the batteries are of sufficient size and are fully charged. Check other electrical components to make sure they are in optimum condition. • Use the proper coolant solution at the concentration recommended protecting the engine against damage from freezing. • Try to keep the fuel tank full as much as possible at the end of operation to prevent condensation in the fuel system. • Make sure you use proper cold weather engine oil and that it is at its proper level. Also, if necessary, make sure to follow the engine oil and filter change schedule found under the Special operating conditions section listed in the scheduled maintenance information. • At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or below, it is recommended that you use an engine block heater to improve cold engine starting. • If operating in arctic temperatures of -20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your truck dealer for information about special cold weather equipment and precautions. Your vehicle has a selective catalytic reduction system that uses Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to operate properly. You need to replenish your vehicle’s DEF at certain intervals. When filling your vehicle’s DEF tank in cold weather, take special care to prevent damage to the tank. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 198). In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the engine may slowly increase to a higher idle speed if you leave it idling in park (P). As the engine warms-up, the engine sound level decreases due to the activation of PCM-controlled sound reduction features. If you operate your vehicle in a heavy snowstorm or blowing snow conditions, snow and ice can clog the engine air induction. If this occurs, the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear all the snow and ice away from inside the air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner cover and the air filter and remove any snow or ice. Remove any debris, snow or ice, on the foam filter by brushing the surface with a soft brush. Once you have cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air filter and cover. Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush for cleaning the foam filter. 181 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Idle Control We recommend the following cold weather idling guidelines: • You can use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from a reputable manufacturer as needed. • Maintain the engine cooling system properly. • Avoid shutting the engine down after an extensive idling period. Drive your vehicle for several miles with the engine at normal operating temperatures under a moderate load. • Consider using an engine block heater. • For extended idle times use an approved idle speed increase device. Your vehicle may have a factory option for a stationary elevated idle control through the upfitter switches in the overhead console. This allows the operator to elevate the idle RPM for extended idle periods, as well as aftermarket equipment such as PTO operation. You must configure this feature even if ordered from the factory. See your authorized dealer for required upfitting. Operation in Snow and Rain Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or extreme rain conditions may feed excessive amounts of snow or water into the air intake system. This could plug the air filter with snow and may cause the engine to lose power and possibly shut down. Winter Operating Tips for Arctic Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below The following information is a guideline only and is not to be the only source of possible solutions in resolving extreme cold temperature issues. We recommend the following actions after operating your vehicle up to 200 mi (320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain: • Starting Aids WARNING Do not use starting fluid, for example ether, in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury. Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and clear all the snow and ice from the air filter housing inlet (do not remove the foam filter) and reset the air filter restriction gauge. Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades your vehicle performance during snow and hot weather conditions. • The use of the factory engine block heater assists in engine starting in extreme cold ambient temperatures See Engine Block Heater (page 183). Extreme rain: The air filter dries after about 15–30 minutes at highway speeds. At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and reset the air filter restriction gauge. Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in the Maintenance chapter for more information. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363). 182 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Operation in Standing Water • Ingestion of water into the diesel engine can result in immediate and severe damage to the engine. If driving through water, slow down to avoid splashing water into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you suspect ingestion of water into the engine, do not try to restart the engine. Consult your dealer for service immediately. • • Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by valves on top of the tank and through the fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the tank, the valves may pull water into the fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause performance issues and damage the fuel injection system. • A chime sounds and the information display will show ENGINE TURNS OFF IN 30 (seconds) and start counting down You can restart the five or 15-minute timer by changing the position of the accelerator pedal, brake pedal or the park brake within the final 30 seconds When the timer reaches zero, the engine shuts down and this message will appear in your information display ENGINE TURNED OFF One minute after the engine has shut down, the electrical system simulates key off, even though the ignition is still in the on position, initiating normal accessory delay period You must move the ignition to the off position to reset the system before restarting your vehicle. SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE - 6.7L DIESEL • Switch the ignition off. The engine idle shutdown idle timer does not start if: To help prolong engine life, we recommended you allow the engine to idle for three to five minutes, especially after any of the following: • Continuous engine speed. • High ambient temperature. • High GVW or GCW operation, for example heavy loads or trailers. • • • The engine is operating in power take-off mode. The engine coolant temperature is below 60°F (16°C). The exhaust emission control device is regenerating. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If This allows the turbo charged engine to cool down. Equipped) WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. ENGINE IDLE SHUTDOWN Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine idle shutdown system. This system automatically shuts down your engine when it has been idling in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for five minutes (parking brake set) or 15 minutes (parking brake not set). When the engine idle shutdown process has started: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. 183 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). • • For cold climates that are below 0°F (-18°C) needing a temporary battery installation. Order the cold climate pack. The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. • • • • Use as short an extension cord as possible. Do not use multiple extension cords. Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. E236180 We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. • locate the block heater cord in the front tow hook pocket. • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. 184 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNINGS Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. • Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. • Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. • Always turn off the vehicle before refueling. 185 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash the affected areas immediately with plenty of soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience any adverse reactions. Fuel and Refueling We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. FUEL QUALITY - E85 Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following identifiers: • Yellow fuel filler cap. • Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. • Yellow fuel filler housing. • Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler door. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E100 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or regular unleaded gasoline blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272). Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. 186 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Switching Between E85 and Gasoline Using low sulfur diesel fuel (16-500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel (greater than 500 ppm) in your diesel engine will cause certain emission components to malfunction which may also cause the service engine soon light to illuminate indicating an emissions-related concern. We do not recommend repeatedly alternating between E85 and gasoline. If you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as possible, at least half a tank. Drive your vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi (8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 exclusively, we recommend that you fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change. Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold temperature. For best results at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), it is recommended to use a diesel fuel which has been seasonally adjusted for the ambient conditions. FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin Islands And Other Locales) For the engine to operate reliably on low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the engine must be a factory built high-sulfur engine (available as a dealer order option for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur diesel fuel configured engine that has been retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using Ford Motor Company dealer service parts. Failure to use retrofit components other than those available through your authorized dealer will result in coolant system damage, engine overheating, selective catalyst reduction system or diesel particulate filter damage and possible base engine damage. You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of 15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20. These fuels should meet the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467 B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications. Outside of North America, use fuels meeting EN590 or equivalent local market standard. Use only a diesel engine configured for use with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel (16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel (greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine emission control devices and the aftertreatment system, potentially rendering the vehicle inoperable. Note: The vehicle Warranty does not cover damage caused by using an improper type of fuel or fuel additive. Note: Do not blend used engine oil with diesel fuel under any circumstances. Blending used oil with the fuel will significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust emissions and reduce engine life due to increased internal wear. 187 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Vehicles with engines configured for use with high sulfur diesel fuel are only available for sale in countries where ultra low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not available or mandated by the government. Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur diesel fuel market that are subsequently exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel markets will need to be retrofitted (at the customer’s expense using Ford authorized dealer service parts) in order to be reliably operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel. • • • • Follow the recommended service maintenance intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel tank for more than 1 month Consider changing brands or reducing biodiesel content if you have cold temperature fuel gelling issues or a frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE message appearing Do NOT use raw oils, fats or waste cooking greases Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater than 20% may cause damage to your vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust after-treatment hardware (exhaust catalyst and particulate filter) failures. Concentrations greater than 20% can also cause fuel filter restrictions that may result in a lack of power or damage to fuel system components, including fuel pump and fuel injector failures. Biodiesel WARNING Do not mix diesel with gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could cause an explosion. Note: Do not use home heating oil, agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste cooking greases, biodiesel fuels greater than 20% or any diesel fuel not intended for highway use. Red dye is used to identify fuels intended for agricultural and non-highway use. Damage to the fuel injection system, engine and exhaust catalyst can occur if an improper fuel is used. SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil is recommended for fuels with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). Refer to the Special operating conditions section under the Schedule Maintenance chapter for more information about oil change intervals and other maintenance when operating on biodiesel. You may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20. Look for a label on the fuel pump to confirm the amount of biodiesel contained in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often indicated with the letter B followed by the percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For example, B20 indicates a fuel containing 20% biodiesel. Ask the service station attendant to confirm the biodiesel content of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on the fuel pump. Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted product from renewable fuel sources, such as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste cooking greases. To help achieve acceptable engine performance and durability when using biodiesel in your vehicle: • Confirm the biodiesel content of the fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less • Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality that complies with industry standards 188 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and should not be stored in the fuel tank for more than 1 month. If you plan to park or store your vehicle for more than 1 month, then you should empty your vehicle fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of 30 minutes. FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE Choosing the Right Fuel Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can damage fuel system seals and plastics and corrode steel parts. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. During cold weather, if you have problems operating on biodiesel, you may need to use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel content, try another brand, or discontinue the use of biodiesel. Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. We do not recommend these fuels. Diesel Fuel Additives It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket additives to your fuel if you use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms to ASTM industry specifications. Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel injector system or engine. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 272). Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an equivalent cetane booster additive if you suspect fuel has low cetane. Use Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance improver or an equivalent additive if there is fuel gelling. Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. Do not use alcohol-based additives to improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol additives may result in damage to the fuel injectors and system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Do not use any fuel other than those recommended because they could lead to engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The Vehicle Warranty may not cover repairs needed to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product that does not meet Ford specifications in your fuel. Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended can impair the emission control system and cause a loss of vehicle performance. 189 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. • • You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time will be longer than usual. Normally, adding 1 gal (4 L) of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1 gal (4 L) may be required. REFUELING - GASOLINE The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. WARNINGS Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries. Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on engine components. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. If you have run out of fuel: Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling. Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. 190 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4th turn on and off feature. When fueling your vehicle: WARNINGS Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. 1. Put your vehicle in park (P). 2. Switch the engine off. 3. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off. 4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 6. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn clockwise until it clicks at least once. Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place approved fuel container on the ground. • Do not fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • Do not use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel Cap message appears in the instrument cluster and stays on after you start the engine, you may not have installed the fuel filler properly. If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap light or Check fuel cap message may not reset immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the indicators to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by normal city and highway driving. Fuel Filler Cap WARNINGS The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. REFUELING - DIESEL WARNINGS Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used. Keep children away from the fuel pump. Never let children pump fuel. 191 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Fueling Tips WARNINGS Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. If air is allowed to enter the fuel system the engine automatically purges any trapped air. To purge the air sooner: prior to engine start, prime the system by turning the key to on for 30 seconds then to off. Repeat this several times. The engine may run rough and produce white smoke while air is in the system. This is normal. Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Use only clean, approved containers that will prevent the entry of dirt or water whenever you store diesel fuel. Diesel fuel must not be stored in a galvanized container. The fuel will dissolve the zinc in the galvanized container. The zinc will then remain in the fuel. If you run the contaminated fuel through the engine, the zinc will deposit in the fuel injectors causing expensive-to-repair damage. Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. Diesel fuel dispensing nozzle fill rate The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. Your vehicle has a fuel fill pipe that is able to accept fuel up to 20 gal (76 L) per minute from an 1.2 in (30 mm) fuel-dispensing nozzle. Pumping fuel at greater flow rates may result in premature nozzle shut-off or spit back. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Truck stops have pumps and nozzles designed for larger, heavy-duty trucks. When refueling at truck stops: if the nozzle shuts off repeatedly when refueling, wait 5–10 seconds; then use a slower rate of flow, do not depress the nozzle trigger as far. Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap designed for your vehicle. The vehicle Warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft® fuel filler cap is not used. Refueling When fueling your vehicle do the following: 1. 192 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove the fuel tank filler cap. The fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off feature. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off. Fuel and Refueling A E119081 4. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and then slowly remove it. 5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close the fuel tank filler door. Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle checked immediately. E139202 2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe opening. Dual Fuel Tanks (If Equipped) Your vehicle may have a dual fuel tank delivery system which operates independently and automatically. The fuel pump in the front fuel tank delivers fuel to the engine. When the fuel level in the front fuel tank drops below three quarter full, fuel automatically transfers from the rear fuel tank to the front fuel tank. Whenever there is fuel in the rear fuel tank, the front fuel tank level remains between half and three quarter full. A E139203 Note: If your vehicle runs out of fuel, you must add fuel to the front fuel tank to restart the engine. B 3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower position B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in the higher position A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. FUEL CONSUMPTION The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank after running out of fuel. Included in the advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. 193 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuel and Refueling Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. Fuel Economy Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures through the trip computer average fuel function. See General Information (page 113). The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the break-in period of the engine. A more accurate measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi (3,000 km). Impacting Fuel Economy • • • • • • • • Incorrect tire inflation pressures. See Towing a Trailer (page 272). Fully loading your vehicle. Carrying unnecessary weight. Adding certain accessories to your vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars or light bars, running boards and ski racks. Using fuel blended with alcohol. See Fuel Quality (page 186). Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures. Fuel economy may decrease when driving short distances. You may get better fuel economy when driving on flat terrain than when driving on hilly terrain. 194 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control Tampering With a Noise Control System EMISSION LAW WARNING Federal laws prohibit the following acts: • Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance. • Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use. • The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design. Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows: • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material. • Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components. Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws. Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light. If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following: • A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose. • A plugged engine air filter element. • Water in the fuel filter and water separator. • A clogged fuel filter. • Contaminated fuel. • Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections. • An open or pinched sensor hose. • Incorrect engine oil level. 195 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control • • Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions. WARNINGS Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Your vehicle has various emission control components and a catalytic converter that enables it to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. • Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected. • Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 305). • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARNINGS Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. Note: Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 196 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 190). 4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are: If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics. 197 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTANT SYSTEM - DIESEL Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic reduction system. The system helps reduce emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from the exhaust system. The system automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid into the exhaust system to enable correct selective catalytic reduction system function. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing. Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems are not fitted to vehicles in markets where only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level In order for the system to operate correctly you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid level. A warning message appears in the information display when the diesel exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning message appears, refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible. See Information Messages (page 129). The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. WARNINGS Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case of contact with your eyes, flush immediately with water and get prompt medical attention. In case of contact with your skin, clean immediately with soap and water. If you swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of water, call a physician immediately. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle. 198 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control WARNINGS Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated area. When you remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause burning to the eyes, throat and nose and cause coughing and watery eyes. ) E163354 E163354 Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust fluid use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the fuel tank. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at an authorized dealer, most highway truck stops or you can contact roadside assistance for help in finding a retailer that sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there is a government website to help you find the nearest location to purchase diesel exhaust fluid: http://www.discoverdef.com. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Fuel Station Pump Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle shuts off automatically when the tank is full. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Container E226045 The following procedure applies to Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar fluid containers. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a diesel exhaust fluid container. We recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust fluid. See Capacities and Specifications (page 427). 1. 199 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Remove the diesel exhaust fluid container cap. Place the spout on to the container and tighten it until you feel a strong resistance. Engine Emission Control Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages and Vehicle Operations 2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap. 3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until the seal on the spout seats on to the filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank. When the tank is full the fluid will stop flowing automatically. 4. Return the container to the vertical position slightly below the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid remaining in the spout to drain back in to the container. 5. Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank cap. 6. Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid container and replace the cap. Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in the container retain it for later use. The spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with clean water prior to storage. Do not use the diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other fluid. WARNINGS Diesel exhaust fluid must be refilled when low or replaced when contaminated or your vehicle speed becomes limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty or contaminated and fluid is not replaced, your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle only once stopped. In these conditions, be cautious where you stop your vehicle because you may not be able to drive long distances or maintain highway speeds until you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid. Tampering with or disabling the selective catalytic reduction system results in severe vehicle performance limitation including eventual speed limiting to 5 mph (8 km/h). The information display shows a series of messages about the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available. A systems check displays messages indicating the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays a warning message indicating the approximate distance remaining as the fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears empty. See Information Messages (page 129). Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in Cold Climates Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C). Your vehicle has a preheating system which allows diesel exhaust fluid to operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not use your vehicle for an extended period when the ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid freezes it may damage the tank. This is not covered by the vehicle warranty. As the diesel exhaust fluid level nears empty, the warning E163176 symbol displays and a series of tones and messages starting at 500 mi (800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and messages continue until you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. 200 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control • Continued driving without refilling results in the following actions as required by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): • Within a preset distance to empty, speed is limited upon vehicle restart. Prior to this occurring a message appears in the information display. • Further vehicle operation without refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank causes the engine to enter an idle-only condition. This only occurs upon vehicle refueling or at an extended idle. A message indicates the required actions to resume normal operation. It is required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal (3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the tank to exit the idle-only condition, but your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting mode until you refill the tank completely. • • • • • Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank from empty, there may be a short delay before detecting the increased level of fluid. The increased level detection must occur before your vehicle returns to full power. • • Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and Information • • • • • Use only diesel exhaust fluid that carries the American Petroleum Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust fluid trademark or ISO 22241. Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the diesel fuel tank. Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive. Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid container once it is emptied. 201 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic components. Immediately wipe away any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled with a damp cloth and water. If it has already crystallized, use warm water and a sponge. Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct sunlight and in temperatures between 23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C). Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F (-11°C). Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could cause damage to interior components or release an ammonia odor inside your vehicle. Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable, non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble liquid. The system has a diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor. Dilution of diesel exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid in the SCR system leads to a diesel exhaust fluid system fault, eventually leading to the vehicle only operating in idle-only mode. Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with water or any other liquid. An ammonia odor may be smelled when the cap is removed or during refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well ventilated area. Engine Emission Control Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage When Using the Power Take Off (PTO) Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation resumes when you repair the contaminated system. To service a contaminated or inoperative system, see an authorized dealer. Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use 0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km) DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction System The filter forms part of the emissions reduction system on your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas. Selective catalytic reduction systems are sensitive to contamination of the diesel exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the fluid is important to avoid system malfunctions. If you remove or drain the diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the same fluid to refill the tank. The system has a sensor to monitor fluid quality. Regeneration WARNING Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. A warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the E163176 information display if the system becomes contaminated or inoperative. Continued driving without replacing diesel exhaust fluid or having the selective catalytic reduction system repaired results in the following actions as required by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): • Within a preset distance to empty, speed is limited upon vehicle restart. Prior to this occurring a message appears in the information display. • Further vehicle operation without replacing contaminated diesel exhaust fluid causes the engine to enter an idle-only condition. This only occurs upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for 10 minutes or more and is indicated by a message in the information display indicating required actions to resume normal operation. Note: Avoid running out of fuel. Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal. Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process. The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle requires periodic regeneration to maintain its correct function. Your vehicle will carry out this process automatically. 202 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control If your journeys meet one of the following conditions: • You drive only short distances. • You frequently switch the ignition on and off. • Your journeys contain a high level of acceleration and deceleration. Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter. The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter in the exhaust system that reduces carbon emissions by trapping exhaust particles before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel particulate filter looks similar to a traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of the exhaust system under your vehicle. The filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst that reduces the amount of harmful exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot gathers in the system, it begins to restrict the filter. The system must periodically clean the soot that gathers inside the filter. This is carried out in two ways, passive regeneration and active regeneration. Both methods occur automatically and require no actions from the driver. During either one of these regeneration methods, you may notice a change in exhaust tone. At certain times, the information display shows various messages related to the diesel particulate filter. See Information Messages (page 129). You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the regeneration process: • Drive your vehicle in more favorable conditions, which you will find at higher vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a main road or freeway for a minimum of 20 minutes. This drive may include short stops that will not affect the regeneration process. • Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions. • Do not switch the ignition off. • Select a suitable gear to ideally maintain engine speed between 1500 and 3000 RPM. Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance You must properly maintain your vehicle's diesel particulate filter in order for it to function properly. Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel Particulate Filter System (If Do not disregard maintenance messages that appear in the information display. Failure to follow the instructions of an information message may degrade vehicle performance and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Equipped) WARNING The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the diesel oxidation catalytic converter or the diesel particulate filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic converter and the diesel particulate filter heat up to very high temperatures after only a short period of engine operation and remain hot after you switch the engine off. Failure to perform active or operator commanded regeneration when instructed could result in a clogged diesel particulate filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills beyond the regeneration threshold, your vehicle disables the ability for active and operator commanded regeneration. This could result in irreversible damage to the diesel particulate filter requiring replacement that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 203 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control Passive Regeneration shows a cleaning exhaust filter message, which is the normal regeneration process. You can also choose operator commanded regeneration to clean the exhaust system at this point. See Information Messages (page 129). In passive regeneration, the exhaust system temperature and constituents automatically clean the filter by oxidizing the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs during normal vehicle operating conditions due to driving patterns. If you are not able to drive in a manner that allows effective automatic active regeneration or you choose to perform regeneration of the diesel particulate filter while at idle, then operator commanded regeneration would need to be performed. Active Regeneration Once the diesel particulate filter is full of exhaust particles, the engine control module commands the exhaust system to clean the filter through active regeneration. Active regeneration requires the engine computer to raise the exhaust temperature to eliminate the particles. During cleaning, the particles convert to harmless gasses. Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter continues trapping exhaust particles. Operator Commanded Regeneration (If Equipped) If your vehicle is operated with significant stationary operation, low speed drive cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully warm up, passive and active regeneration may not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate filter system. Operator commanded regeneration allows you to manually start regeneration of the diesel particulate filter at idle to clean the filter. If you are not sure whether your vehicle has this feature, contact an authorized dealer. The regeneration process operates more efficiently when you drive your vehicle at a constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed for approximately 20 minutes. The frequency and duration of regeneration fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle, outside air temperature and altitude. For most driving, regeneration frequency varies from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between occurrences and each occurrence lasts 9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the duration of regeneration if you maintain a constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h). When to Carry Out Operator Commanded Regeneration You can use the operator commanded regeneration feature when a message appears in the information display and you are not able to drive in a manner that allows effective automatic active regeneration or if you choose to manually start the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually while the vehicle is idle. See Information Messages (page 129). When the engine control module detects that the diesel particulate filter is nearly full of particulates and you are not operating your vehicle in a manner to allow effective automatic regeneration, messages appear in the information display as a reminder for you to drive your vehicle in order to clean the diesel particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle in a manner to allow effective automatic regeneration, the information display 204 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control How to Start Operator Commanded Regeneration Operator Commanded Regeneration Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position WARNINGS Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. WARNING Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust gases can burn you badly. Note: You cannot use the operator commanded regeneration until the diesel particulate filter load percentage has reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter load percentage fluctuates up and down when driving your vehicle due to active and passive regenerations. Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust gases can burn you badly. Note: During the use of operator commanded regeneration, you may observe a light amount of white smoke. This is normal. Make sure that the louvers located at the tip of the exhaust are clear of any obstructions as they are used to introduce fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust system. You may not be able to use operator commanded regeneration if the service engine soon warning lamp appears in the information display Before you start operator commanded regeneration, do the following: • Shift into park (P) and apply the parking brake, on stable, level ground. • Park your vehicle outside of any structure. • Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m) away from any obstructions and away from materials that can easily combust or melt, for example paper, leaves, petroleum products, fuels, plastics and other dry organic material. • Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8 tank of fuel. • Make sure all fluids are at proper levels. Information Display Procedure Start with your vehicle engine and when it has reached the normal operating temperature, press the information display control button on the steering wheel. See Information Display Control (page 85). If a message advising that the exhaust filter is full appears in the information display, press the OK button as instructed. Answer yes to this prompt and then follow the next prompts regarding the exhaust position required to initiate operator commanded regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an authorized dealer. The display confirms the operation has started and when it has finished. 205 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control If the diesel particulate filter is near or at saturation, a message requesting permission to initiate filter cleaning appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 129). Answer yes to this prompt and then follow the next prompts regarding exhaust position required to initiate operator commanded regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an authorized dealer. The display confirms the operation has started and when it has finished. You can also drive to clean the filter. Operator Commanded Regeneration with Automatic Regeneration Control (If Equipped) If your vehicle is operated with significant stationary operation, low speed drive cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully warm up, passive and active regeneration may not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate filter system. You can switch off automatic regeneration until better driving conditions are available, for example steady high speed driving. You can then switch automatic regeneration back on to clean the diesel particulate filter. When the system is at the point of oversaturation, the service engine warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the information display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning. You must have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Switching Automatic Regeneration Control On and Off To switch operator commanded regeneration on and off, use the information display control on the steering wheel. See Information Display Control (page 85). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning message, a check in the box indicates the feature is enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature is disabled. Once operator commanded regeneration starts, engine speed increases to approximately 2000 rpm and the cooling fan speed increases. You will hear a change in audible sound due to engine speed and cooling fan speed increases. How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator Commanded Regeneration It is not necessary to open the hood on the engine compartment. Once operator commanded regeneration completes, the engine speed returns to normal idling. The exhaust system remains very hot for several minutes even after regeneration is complete. Do not reposition the vehicle over materials that could burn until the exhaust system has had sufficient time to cool. Depending on the amount of soot collected by the diesel particulate filter, ambient temperature and altitude, operator commanded regeneration lasts approximately 30 minutes. If you need to cancel the operator commanded regeneration, pressing the brake, accelerator or switching the engine off stops the procedure. Depending on the amount of time you allowed the operator commanded regeneration to operate, soot may not have had sufficient time to be fully eliminated, but the exhaust system and exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut your vehicle off during operator commanded regeneration, you may notice turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence caused by shutting off a diesel engine during boosted operation and is considered normal. 206 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Engine Emission Control Filter Service and Maintenance Over time, a slight amount of ash builds up in the diesel particulate filter, which is not removed during the regeneration process. The filter may need to be replaced with a new or remanufactured part at approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km). Actual mileage varies depending on engine and vehicle operating conditions. If filter service is required, the engine control system warning lamp illuminates in the information display. If there are any issues with the diesel particulate filter system, the engine control system warning lamp and a service engine soon warning lamp illuminate to inform you that your vehicle requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly Maintenance Aftermarket devices or modifications to the exhaust system may reduce the effectiveness of the exhaust system as well as cause damage to the exhaust system or engine. This may also degrade vehicle performance and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 207 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission Park (P) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. WARNINGS Always fully apply the parking brake. Make sure you shift into park (P) for vehicles with an automatic transmission. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Reverse (R) With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your vehicle moves backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). When your vehicle is stationary, keep the brake pedal fully pressed when shifting gears. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury, death or property damage. Neutral (N) With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position. Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. Drive (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The drive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through six. Understanding the Shift Positions of Your Automatic Transmission (If Equipped) M (Manual) With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the driver can change gears up or down as desired. By moving the gearshift lever from drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you now have control of selecting the gear you desire using buttons on the shift lever. See Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission later in this section. E163183 Putting your vehicle in or out of gear: To return to normal drive (D) position, move the shift lever back from manual (M) to drive (D). 1. Fully press down the brake pedal. 2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. 3. When you are finished driving, come to a complete stop. 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P). The transmission operates in gears one through six. Second (2) Transmission operates in second (2) gear only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on slippery roads. 208 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission First (1) • • • • The tow/haul feature: • Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency of transmission shifting. • Provides engine braking in all forward gears, which slows your vehicle and assists you in controlling your vehicle when descending a grade. • Depending on driving conditions and load conditions, may downshift the transmission, slow your vehicle and control your vehicle speed when descending a hill, without pressing the accelerator pedal. The amount of downshift braking provided varies based upon the amount you press the brake pedal. Transmission operates in first (1) gear only. Provides maximum engine braking. Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever. Does not downshift into first (1) gear at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds. Forced downshifts • • • Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul feature on or off. Press the accelerator to the floor. Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear. The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when using tow/haul. Tow/Haul Mode WARNING Do not use tow/haul when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Steering System, enabling the tow/haul feature adjusts the steering response. In tow/haul mode the Adaptive Steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds when maintaining the ease of parking and maneuverability at low speeds. See Steering (page 259). To activate tow/haul, press the button on the gearshift lever E161509 once. The TOW HAUL indicator light illuminates in the instrument cluster. To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode, press the button on the gearshift lever when tow/haul is active. The TOW HAUL light deactivates. Tow/haul also deactivates when you power down your vehicle. 209 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped) The SelectShift Automatic transmission feature has two modes: PRS and M mode. PRS (Progressive Range Selection) Progressive Range Selection gives you the ability to lockout gears from the automatic shifting range. This may provide you with an improved driving experience (for example, in slippery conditions or when experiencing a steep grade). With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press the – button to active PRS. The available and selected gears are indicated on the instrument cluster. E163184 All available gears display with the current gear indicated. Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only the available gears display and the transmission automatically shifts between the available gears. Press the + button to unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears. The transmission shifts automatically within the gear range you select. Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever. The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as desired. In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically make some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines that damage will not be caused to the engine from over-revving. Manual (M) Moving the gearshift lever to the manual (M) position allows you to manually select the gear you desire. Only the current gear displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift lever to manually select gears. Press the + button to upshift or the – button to downshift. Return the transmission to a different gearshift position to deactivate manual control. SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button. Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting. Recommended shift speeds Upshift according to the following chart: 210 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission Upshifts When Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) Shift from: Gasoline engines Diesel engines 1–2 15 mph (24 km/h) 12 mph (19 km/h) 2–3 25 mph (40 km/h) 19 mph (31 km/h) 3–4 40 mph (64 km/h) 26 mph (42 km/h) 4–5 45 mph (72 km/h) 34 mph (55 km/h) 5–6 50 mph (80 km/h) 46 mph (74 km/h) Note: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working. Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from moving from park (P) when the ignition is on and the brake pedal is not pressed. This feature's design is to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is normal and does not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process fully updates transmission operation. Additionally, whenever you disconnect the battery or install a new battery, the system must relearn the strategy. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of park (P) position with the ignition is on and the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction may have occurred. It is possible that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 317). If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the following procedure allows you to move the gearshift lever from park (P): Brake-Shift Interlock WARNINGS When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate. 1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the ignition key to 1 (off), then remove the key. 2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position (toward the driver’s seat). 3. Remove the gearshift lever boot. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 211 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission 4. Place fingers into hole where you removed the gearshift lever boot and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point to clear the hazard flasher button, then pull straight rearward toward the driver’s seat to remove. 5. Remove the top half of the shroud. 6. Remove the three fasteners under the column that secure the lower shroud half to the column. E163186 9. Start your vehicle. Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward direction as you rotate the halves together. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. E163185 7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked position and remove the lower shroud cover by pulling the lever handle through the slot in the cover. 8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override disk and move the gearshift lever into neutral (N). If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 212 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Transmission POWER TAKE-OFF (If Equipped) WARNING Use of auxiliary equipment that exceeds the maximum Power Take-Off (PTO) load specified in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book can adversely affect the performance of the powertrain system. Refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include a wheel-lift for tow trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire service, and pumping fluids. PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain, often while the vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving. The aftermarket PTO system installer, having the most knowledge of the final application, is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or powertrain cooling is required, and alerting the user to the safe and proper operation. Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for use as a stationary (including split shaft capability) or mobile power source, within limits and operating guidelines detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas, and through the Ford Truck Body Builders Advisory Service. 213 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE Note: For important information regarding the safe operation of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels and Tires chapter. LOCK Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these surfaces may produce some noise (such as occasional clunks), but will not damage drive components. F RE E E163187 The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged by rotating the control for both front wheel hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position, then manually engaging or disengaging the transfer case with the floor-mounted shifter. For increased fuel economy in 2WD, rotate both hub locks to the FREE position. Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low) for proper operation. Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD system (If Equipped) Note: You can switch on and switch off the electronic locking differential by pulling the 4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the electronic locking differential control (2WD vehicles). See Electronic Locking Differential (page 223). Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low) for proper system operation. Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD system (If Equipped) Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be manually overridden by rotating the hub lock control from AUTO to LOCK. Note: The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High or 4X4 Low modes with the hub locks set to FREE as this condition may damage driveline system components. LOCK A U TO E163188 214 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 4X4 LOW For proper operation, make sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position (both set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To engage LOCK, turn the hub locks completely clockwise; to engage AUTO, turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise. Continuously illuminates when 4L is selected. E181780 CHECK 4X4 Displays when a 4X4 fault is present. The ESOF 4WD system: • • • • provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is moving. is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that allows you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation. uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected. will increase fuel economy when used in the hub lock's recommended AUTO mode. Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD system (If Equipped) Note: High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4 modes. It is recommended to allow the vehicle to roll at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) when shifting between modes. 4WD Indicator Lights Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. E233846 2H (4X2) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only and should be used for street and highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds 4X2 Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected. E163173 4H (4X4 High) 4X4 HIGH Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off road situations. This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement. Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected. E181779 215 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 3. Move the transfer case shift lever through N (Neutral) directly to the desired position. 4. If the transfer case does not, or only partially moves to the desired position, perform a shift with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the vehicle rolling at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h). 5. If shifting to 2H with the vehicle at a complete stop, disengage the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE. N (Neutral) Only used when towing the vehicle. No power to front or rear wheels. 4L (4X4 Low) Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off road applications such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. Shifting between system modes Using the N (Neutral) position Note: Do not perform these operations if the rear wheels are slipping or when applying the accelerator pedal. WARNING Always set the parking brake and leave your vehicle with the transmission in park (P). Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages. This is normal. In order to reduce engagement noise, it is recommended that all shifts be performed at speeds below3 mph (5 km/h). Note: The vehicle should not be driven in 4X4 High with the hub locks disengaged as this condition may damage driveline system components. Engage the locking hubs by rotating the hub lock control from FREE to LOCK, then move the transfer case lever from 2H to 4H at a stop or a vehicle speed below 3 mph (5 km/h). Move the transfer case lever from 4H to 2H at a stop or a vehicle speed below 3 mph (5 km/h), then disengage the locking hubs (optional) by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE. E233846 For proper operation, make sure that both hubs are set to either FREE or LOCK. The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backwards. Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low) This position should only be used when towing the vehicle. 1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral). 216 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system (If Equipped) Shifting between system modes Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal when a shift in progress message displays improves engagement or disengagement performance. Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping or when applying the accelerator pedal. Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement. You can move the control from 2H or 4H at a stop or while driving. The information display may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is complete the message center will then display the system mode selected. E191851 2H (4X2) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only and should be used for street and highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds. Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. 4H (4X4 HIGH) Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement. Provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or winter conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is not for use on dry pavement. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. 2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral). 3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. 1. 4L (4X4 LOW) The information display will display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. The information display will then display the system mode selected. If any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur and the information display will display information guiding the driver through the proper shifting procedures. Provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces, but does so with additional gearing for increased torque multiplication. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage while your vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation. 217 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) If Shift Delayed Pull Forward appears in the information display, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles Note: On some models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing 15 bolts. Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. 218 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Basic Operating Principles • • • required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration and braking. This could result in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control and personal injury. Use all available road surface to bring your vehicle to a safe direction of travel. Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. When driving your vehicle on surfaces made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice proceed with care. Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4H or 4L modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. If your vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e. steering, acceleration or braking). If Your Vehicle leaves the Road Sand If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your vehicle speed and avoid severe braking. When your vehicle speed has been reduced ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do not turn the steering wheel sharply while returning your vehicle to the road. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip. It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the road. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability. It may be less risky to strike small objects, such as freeway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the road which could cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this causes vehicle momentum to work against you and your vehicle could become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. Emergency Maneuvers Mud and Water In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering can result in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal when changes in vehicle speed are Mud Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. 219 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts can cause an imbalance that could damage drive components. If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around because this could cause vehicle roll over. It is better to reverse back to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth and avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system gets wet, your vehicle may stall. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by applying light pressure to the brake pedal while moving slowly. Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary. E143949 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive or move the transmission selector lever to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer your vehicle. Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes. Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. 220 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Driving on Snow and Ice WARNING WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute, damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Parking WARNINGS If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Always set the parking brake and leave your vehicle with the transmission in park (P). On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not pump the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 227). 221 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty. For this reason, we strongly recommend that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. We recommend that you use caution when your vehicle has either a high load or device (i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any modifications to your vehicle that raise the center of gravity may cause your vehicle to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle control. Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect you and your passenger's safety. We recommend you frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis components when your vehicle is subject to off road usage. 222 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Rear Axle • LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the limited-slip axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration during tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working. • ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) • Note: The electronic locking differential is for off-road use only and is not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differential on dry pavement will result in increased tire wear, noise and vibration. • The electronic locking differential is a device housed in the rear axle that allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. The electronic locking differential can provide additional traction should your vehicle become stuck. You can activate the differential electronically and shift it on the fly within the differential operating speed range. The differential is for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition where you need maximum traction. It is not for use on dry pavement. When you switch the system on, if you do not meet the required conditions for electronic locking differential activation, the instrument cluster will display the appropriate information guiding you through the proper activation process. Activating the Electronic Locking Differential The following conditions will affect the electronic locking differential: • • The electronic locking differential may not engage if you press your accelerator pedal during an engagement attempt. A message may display in the instrument display guiding you to release the accelerator pedal. In 4x2 or 4x4 High modes, the electronic locking differential will automatically disengage at speeds above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking differential will automatically disengage at speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 56 mph (90 km/h). The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of the electronic locking differential and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary. Note: Do not use electronic locking differential on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, vibration and increase tire wear. The electronic locking differential will not engage if your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2 or 4x4 High modes. The electronic locking differential will not engage if your vehicle speed is above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4 Low. Note: If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling. 223 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Rear Axle For 4WD vehicles • • • E227398 Pull the 4WD control knob toward you. For 2WD vehicles E183740 Turn the control to ON. Once the indicator light illuminates in the information E163170 display, both rear wheel axle shafts will be locked together providing added traction. If the indicator does not come on, or the indicator turns off while driving, one of the following has occurred: 224 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing The vehicle speed is too high. The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an engagement attempt. The system has malfunctioned and is accompanied by a message in the information display. See your authorized Ford dealer for assistance. Brakes Anti-lock Brake System GENERAL INFORMATION This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have it checked by an authorized dealer. This lamp momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. If the brake warning lamp remains illuminated after you E144522 release the parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 108). E144522 It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Shift the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. Diesel Engine Exhaust Braking (If Equipped) WARNINGS Do not use tow/haul when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. Do not use diesel engine exhaust braking when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal, and can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. This feature increases engine braking at higher engine speeds to provide better grade descent control with less brake and transmission wear and tear. Note: Use this when driving downhill and carrying heavy loads or trailering. 225 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Brakes Benefits of engine braking are: • Lower brake temperature. • Reduced brake fade. • Longer brake life. • Improved driving and trailering control. E171217 Note: This feature offers smoother, less aggressive engine braking during downhill descents. It may not apply braking if the vehicle speed is not increasing, although it will apply full engine braking force when needed to prevent acceleration. The system automatically activates the engine brake and, if necessary, downshifts the transmission to lower gears to not exceed your vehicle's set speed when the brake or accelerator were last released. Press the button on the switch bank next to the audio unit to switch the system on or off. There are two engine brake modes, manual and automatic. Warning Lamp Conditions • Manual Engine Braking 1. Press the button to switch on manual engine braking. 2. Release the accelerator pedal to maximize engine braking. 3. Apply the brakes. The transmission downshifts to lower gears. Note: The engine braking feature only functions when you release the accelerator. • • Illuminates when this feature is switched on and the system is operating properly. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 108). Flashes when the engine brake is disabled due to a fault or the engine does not meet the required braking conditions. Does not illuminate when the switch or indicator is faulty. You can switch the system on at anytime. The system becomes active once the braking conditions are met. Note: You can shift the transmission to lower gears with progressive range selection (PRS) or manual shifting independent of pressing the brakes. Braking Conditions Note: You can also use manual engine braking with cruise control to improve grade descent control. • • Note: If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control, the speed control system uses the selected engine brake mode, transmission gears, and brakes to maintain the set speed and distance to the vehicle being followed. • Your vehicle is in a forward gear. The engine speed is above about 1500 RPM. Your foot is off the accelerator. You can use this feature with tow/haul or progressive range selection to provide further increased engine braking. The transmission automatically upshifts to prevent the engine from entering the red zone on the tachometer. See Automatic Transmission (page 208). Automatic Engine Braking 1. Press the button twice to switch on automatic engine braking. 2. Release the accelerator or brake pedal. The system remembers your vehicle speed. 226 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Brakes If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle may be overloaded. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. HILL START ASSIST WARNING WARNINGS The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is placed in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake and engage park could result in vehicle roll-away, property damage or bodily injury. Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. PARKING BRAKE The system will turn off if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev the engine excessively. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Apply the parking brake whenever your vehicle is parked. Press the pedal downward to set the parking brake. The brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate and remains illuminated until the parking brake is released. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of the instrument panel. When the system is active, your vehicle remains stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The system releases the brakes 227 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Brakes automatically once the engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission You cannot turn the system on or off. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. The system activates on any slope that causes your vehicle to roll. Note: There is no warning light to indicate the system is either on or off. Using Hill Start Assist 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep the brake pedal pressed and shift into first gear when facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing downhill. 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system activates automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the slope without rolling away for about two to three seconds. This hold time automatically extends if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes automatically. Note: When you remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the pedal again when the system is active, you will experience significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This is normal. Switching the System On and Off Vehicles with Manual Transmission You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. 228 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Traction Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. E166706 Use the traction and stability control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on. USING TRACTION CONTROL The switch illuminates when traction control is off. WARNING When you place your vehicle into four-wheel drive low mode the traction control disables. Traction control resumes full operation when you put your vehicle back into two-wheel drive mode. The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. System Indicator Lights and Messages The stability and traction control light: E225465 • • The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. • If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. Temporarily illuminates on engine start-up. Flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems. Illuminates if a problem occurs in either of the systems. The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on when you switch the traction control system off. E225466 Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Note: For additional information on the traction and stability control systems. See Using Stability Control (page 231). Switching the System Off When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status. 229 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Stability Control If a fault occurs in either the stability control or the traction control system, you may experience the following conditions: PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • • • The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily. The stability control and traction control systems do not enhance your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels. The Adaptive Steering system (if equipped) automatically changes the steering function to a fixed steering ratio. See Steering (page 259). If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions: • • • • • • Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the system applies higher brake force. The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: Electronic Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 230 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Stability Control Roll Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually. AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC®) The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. Traction Control The electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system can be turned off. The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 229). When you shift the transmission into reverse R, the systems disable. E130458 Use the traction and stability control switch on the instrument panel to switch the systems off or on. B You can switch the traction control portion of the system off independently. If you cannot turn the systems off, see the MyKey chapter for more information. B B A A B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. 231 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Stability Control AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Button functions Stability control light Roll stability control Electronic stability control Traction control system Default at startup Illuminated during bulb check Enabled Enabled Enabled Button pressed momentarily Illuminated Enabled Enabled 1 Disabled Button pressed and held for more than 5 seconds illuminated 3 Disabled Disabled Disabled Double Press (Pickup Only) Illuminated Enabled Enabled Button pressed again after deactivation Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled Transfer case switched to Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled 4WD Low 1 1 2 Enabled 4 Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system. 2 Traction control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system. 3 Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state. 4 Engaging 4WD Low automatically disables roll stability control, electronic stability control and the traction control systems. 232 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Terrain Control (If Equipped) PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL WARNINGS Hill descent control cannot control descent in all surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury. Press and release the hill descent button located on the instrument panel. A light in the cluster will illuminate and a chime will sound when this feature is activated. E163957 To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until the desired speed is reached. To decrease descent speed, press the brake pedal until the desired speed is reached. Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour (0 kilometers per hour). When stopped, the parking brake must be applied or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll away. Whether accelerating or decelerating, once the desired descent speed is reached, remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed will be maintained. Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and should be no reason for concern. Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep grades in various surface conditions. Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot be set or maintained. Hill descent modes Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active before cooling varies with conditions. The system will provide a warning in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed. • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the Hill Descent Control switch is pressed and Hill Descent Control is active, the Hill Descent Control telltale will flash. • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the Hill Descent Control switch is pressed and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation, the Hill Descent Control system will be enabled, the Hill Descent Control telltale will be solid and a message will display in the information display. • At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When the Hill Descent Control switch is pressed, the Hill Descent Control system will be enabled, the telltale in the cluster will not be illuminated and a message will be displayed in the information display. 233 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Terrain Control (If Equipped) Refer to the Information Displays for additional Hill Descent Control messages. See Information Messages (page 129). 234 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids Note: The sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey is present. See Principle of Operation (page 63). PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume reduces to a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume returns to the previous level. Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system.This may cause reduced performance or false alerts. The sensing system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 113). The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display and you cannot switch the system on through the pop-up message. See Information Messages (page 129). Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false beeps. For example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped) The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. See your authorized technician. Note: When a trailer is connected to your vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the trailer and therefore provide warnings. Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer is connected to prevent these warnings. 235 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. E231381 Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. Reverse your vehicle as slow as possible, higher speeds may limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle. The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Use caution when the tailgate is ajar. If the tailgate is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the tailgate is ajar. Some vehicles may not come equipped with guidelines. Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you shift the transmission into reverse (R). The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper. During operation, lines appear in the display that represents the path of your vehicle and proximity to objects behind it. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the display screen. See Rear View Camera (page 236). 236 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind your vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged. The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse lamps are not operating. • Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. • The camera is misaligned due to damage to the rear of your vehicle. E223144 The rear view camera is located on the tailgate. Using the Rear View Camera System The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines: Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). Camera Guidelines Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: The centerline is only available if Active or Fixed guidelines are on. Note: Some vehicles may not come equipped with guidelines. Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the tailgate is ajar, no rear view camera features are displayed. Note: If the image does not turn off while the transmission is not in reverse (R) and you are driving over a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), have the system inspected by an authorized dealer. 237 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids A B C D Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. E Obstacle Distance Indicator F E142436 A Active guidelines B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone E190459 D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper The system will provide an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will highlight green, yellow and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing, the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. Rear Camera Delay Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight. 238 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: • Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases. • You shift your vehicle into park (P). • You apply the parking brake on vehicles with a manual transmission. • Allows you to see a top-down view of the area outside your vehicle, including the blind spots. Provides visibility around your vehicle to you in parking maneuvers such as: • Centering in a parking space. • Obstacles near vehicle. • Parallel parking. • Camera Views 360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped) WARNINGS The 360 degree camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of the windows, and checking the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. E205884 The camera button is located on the instrument panel. Pressing the camera button activates the system. When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only images from the front cameras are displayed. Press the camera button to display the front camera image on the display screen. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. When in reverse (R), only images from the rear cameras are displayed. When you shift into reverse (R), the rear view camera image automatically shows on the display screen. Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. Advanced Camera Views (If Equipped) Additional camera views may be available for vehicles with specific features. Press the small camera icon shown on the top left corner of the display screen to open the camera view menu. E233726 Note: The 360 degree camera system turns off when your vehicle is in motion at low speed, except when in reverse (R). The 360 degree camera system consists of front, side and rear cameras. The system: • Allows you to see what is directly in front or behind your vehicle. • Provides cross traffic view in front and behind your vehicle. The following camera views can be accessed in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D) when you press the camera button: • Front 360 + Normal: Contains the normal front camera view next to a 360 degree camera view. • Front Normal View: Provides an image of what is directly in front of your vehicle. 239 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids • • • Keep Out Zone Front Split View: Provides an extended view of what is in front of your vehicle. Rear High View: Provides an image of your truck bed and can be used to assist you when backing up to align and hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view image from the back of your trailer while reversing. The following camera views can be accessed when you shift into reverse (R): • Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the normal rear camera view next to a 360 degree camera view. Press the zoom (+) button to quickly access Rear Normal View from this screen. • Rear Normal View: Provides an image of what is directly behind your vehicle. • Rear Split View: Provides an extended view of what is behind your vehicle. • Rear High View: Provides an image of your truck bed and can be used to assist you when backing up to align and hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. • Auxiliary View: Provides a rear view image from the back of your trailer while reversing. • Trailer Reverse Guidance View: Provides an image of the rear of your vehicle using the side cameras, useful when reversing with a trailer. Use the arrows at the bottom of the screen to adjust the side camera position. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274). E184448 The Keep Out Zone is represented by the yellow dotted lines running parallel to your vehicle. It is designed to give you the indication on the ground of the fully extended outside mirror position. Front Camera WARNING The front camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of your vehicle. E184044 240 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids Center High-Mount Stop Lamp Camera (If Equipped) The front video camera, located in the grille, provides a video image of the area in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance to the driver while driving forward at low speeds. To use the front video camera system, place the transmission in any gear except reverse (R). An image will display once the camera enable button is pressed. The area displayed on the screen may vary according to your vehicle's orientation and/or road condition. Side Camera E231402 The center high-mount stop lamp camera system is a variant of the rear view camera that is mounted within the high-mount stop lamp. It is designed to display the contents of your truck bed or assist you when backing up to align and hitch a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. The center high-mount stop lamp camera is not meant as an alternative to the rear view camera. E231401 The side view camera, located in the outside mirror, provide a video image of the area on the sides of your vehicle. It aids you while parking your vehicle, or when parking with a trailer attached. Note: Use caution when using the 360 view while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. E233763 The center high-mount stop lamp camera view contains a dynamic guideline to help you locate the center of your vehicle. This view can only be accessed while in reverse (R). 241 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Parking Aids Auxiliary Camera (If Equipped) Note: The auxiliary camera works with trailers up to 50 ft (15 m) in length. E233727 Access the auxiliary camera view by pressing the button on the display screen when in reverse (R). The auxiliary camera system is a variant of the rear view camera. It is designed to display a rear view image from the back of a trailer while reversing. The auxiliary camera is not meant as an alternative to the rear view camera. 242 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) The indicator appears in the information display. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION E71340 Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). Setting the Cruise Speed 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press SET+ or SET-. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator changes color. USING CRUISE CONTROL WARNINGS Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Changing the Set Speed Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes. • • Note: Cruise control disengages if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed when driving uphill. • Press SET+ or SET- to change the set speed in small increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press SET+ or SET-. Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Resuming the Set Speed Press RES. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. E191329 The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Press OFF when the system is in standby mode, or switch the ignition off. Switching Cruise Control On Press ON. 243 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNINGS Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system. WARNINGS Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death. Do not use adaptive cruise control with a snow plow blade installed. Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The system adjusts your vehicle speed to maintain the set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You can select four gap settings. Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes. The system uses a radar sensor that projects a beam directly in front of your vehicle. Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. Do not use the system when towing a trailer with aftermarket trailer brake controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly when you switch the system on because the brakes are electronically controlled. Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. E183737 The adaptive cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Adaptive cruise control may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). Press ON. Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road. E144529 Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane. 244 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display. Cruise Control (If Equipped) Following a Vehicle WARNINGS When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. E233874 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display. 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press SET+ or SET-. 3. A green indicator light, the current gap setting and your set speed appear in the information display. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive cruise control may provide a small temporary acceleration to help you pass. Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster. Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until: • The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in. • You set a new gap distance. E233874 5. A vehicle image illuminates if the system detects a vehicle in front of you. The system applies the brakes to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front. The system only applies limited braking. You can override the system by applying the brakes. 245 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) If the system determines that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient, an audible warning sounds when the system continues to brake. A red warning bar displays on the windshield and you must take immediate action. The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the image. Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings Setting the Gap Distance Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles Dynamic behavior 1 Sport. 2 Normal. 3 Normal. 4 Comfort. Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed. Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions. You can decrease or increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front by pressing the gap control. Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting. Overriding the Set Speed WARNING If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead. When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance. E183739 A Gap decrease. B Gap increase. When you override the system, the green indicator light illuminates and the vehicle image does not appear in the information display. E144529 The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle. E233874 246 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) Changing the Set Speed • • • Note: When towing with adaptive cruise control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode and Diesel Engine Brake. Press SET+ or SET- to change the set speed in small increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press SET+ or SET-. Press and hold SET+ or SET- to change the set speed in large increments. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Note: Tow/Haul mode increases the time gaps and allows more distance for braking. Select a lower gear when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades, for example in mountainous areas. The system needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it from overheating. The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off Note: You erase the set speed and gap setting when you switch the system off. Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Press OFF when the system is in standby mode, or switch the ignition off. Resuming the Set Speed Detection Issues Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it. WARNINGS On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Automatic Cancellation Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an audible warning sounds and a message appears in the information display. Automatic braking releases. If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow Usage The radar sensor has a limited field of view. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you. Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again after the brakes cool. 247 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take action when necessary. If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detection. System Not Available Note: If you disable electronic stability control, adaptive cruise control is not available. The system may not turn on if there is: • A blocked sensor. • High brake temperature. • A failure in the system or a related system. Blocked Sensor E71621 Detection issues can occur: A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front. B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane. C E183741 Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind a fascia panel. A message displays if something obstructs the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor is in the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something blocks the sensor. There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road. 248 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Cruise Control (If Equipped) Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying: Cause Action The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed. Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction. The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no roadside objects. Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control. Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle. The cruise control indicator light replaces the adaptive cruise E71340 control indicator light if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, and the system does not respond to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains active to maintain set speed. Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary. You can change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display. 249 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If System Settings Equipped) The system sensitivity and intensity can be adjusted through the display screen. See General Information (page 113). The system remembers the last selection. You do not need to readjust the setting each time you turn on your vehicle. WARNING The system is designed to aid the driver. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention. Sensitivity: This setting allows you to select where in the lane a warning is provided. Increasing the sensitivity setting moves the warning zones in closer to your vehicle. Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking at a speed above 40 mph (64 km/h). Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked or there is damage to the windshield. The Lane Keeping System automatically detects and tracks the road lane markings using a camera mounted behind the interior review view mirror. The system notifies you to stay in your lane when the front camera detects an unintentional lane change is likely to occur. E165517 Switching the System On and Off Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey is detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert. Normal B Increased Note: The alert diagram illustrates general zone coverage. It does not provide exact zone parameters. Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the button will not affect the on or off status of the system. You can only change the mode and intensity settings. E173233 A Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration. Increasing the intensity causes a higher rate of haptic feedback. Press the button located on the center console to switch the system on or off. • • • 250 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing High Normal Low Driving Aids System Display • • • See Troubleshooting for additional information. E233874 When you switch on the system, an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings appears in the display screen. Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning on the indicated side(s). Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still display if adaptive cruise control is enabled. Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning. While the system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status. You can temporarily disable the system at any time by doing the following: • Quick braking. • Fast acceleration. • Using your direction indicator. • Evasive steering maneuver. Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning on the indicated side(s). This may be because: • • Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver. The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field-of-view. The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental conditions (significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog), traffic conditions (following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane), or vehicle conditions (poor headlamp illumination). Your vehicle is under the activation speed. Your turn indicator is active. Troubleshooting Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature Sun is shining directly into the camera lens Quick intentional lane change Staying too close to the lane marking Driving at high speeds in curves 251 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Previous feature activation happened within the last one second Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones) Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa Sudden offset in lane markings ABS or AdvanceTrac activation Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa Standing water on the road Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads) Lane width too narrow or too wide Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads Vehicle accessories such as snow plows BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (If Equipped) WARNING Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving. E227388 252 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids System Lights and Messages The Blind Spot Information System is designed to aid you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is designed to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving. Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not prevent contact with other vehicles or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees). It is only designed to alert you to moving vehicles in the blind spot zones. E142442 The Blind Spot Information System illuminates an amber alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. When the Blind Spot Information System is alerting on a vehicle and the corresponding turn signal is ON, the Blind Spot Information System alert indicator flashes as an increased warning level. Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two seconds, the system does not trigger. Using the System The Blind Spot Information System turns on when you start the engine and you drive your vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h). The alert indicator dims when the system detects nighttime darkness. Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of an alert and the turn signal is set to that side at the same time. For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot Information System remains on while the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot Information System turns off. Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information System turns back on when you drive your vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h). System Sensor Blockage Note: For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot Information System does not function in reverse (R) or park (P). For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot Information System is on for all gears except reverse (R). E231384 253 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow (If Equipped) The system uses radar sensors that are located inside the tail lamp on each side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow in front of the sensors or driving in heavy rain can cause system degradation. Also, other types of obstructions in front of the sensor can cause system degradation. This is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition. Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or repair compound to these areas, this can cause degraded system performance. If the system detects a degraded performance condition, a message warning appears in the display screen. The alert indicators remain ON and the system no longer provides any warnings. You can clear the warning but the alert indicators remain illuminated. E225007 The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow is designed to aid you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the detection area zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer. A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two ways: • After the blockage in front of the sensors is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to detect passing vehicles. • By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON. When a trailer is attached and the customer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer, the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow becomes active when driving forward above 6 mph (10 km/h). See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 274). The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow can be turned off in the instrument cluster. If the Blind Spot Information System is turned off, then the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow automatically turns off. Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a factory equipped trailer tow module and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will automatically turn the Blind Spot Information System off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is recommended to turn the Blind Spot Information System off manually. Operating the Blind Spot Information System without the Blind Spot Trailer Tow package and a trailer attached will cause poor system performance. 254 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids The width of the trailer is measured at the front of the trailer. It is not measured at the widest point of the trailer. The maximum width at the front of the trailer that the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m). Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer Note: You do not need to enter an exact trailer width measurement; just measure that it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less. • E225008 A Trailer length B Trailer width C Trailer hitch ball The trailer length is the distance between the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the trailer. The maximum length that the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow can support is 33 ft (10.1 m). You can set-up any trailer to work with the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow through the instrument cluster menu. See General Information (page 113). While setting up a trailer, a sequence of screens appear asking for trailer information. The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow specific screens are described below: • • Select type of trailer screen Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck. If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, a warning appears in the instrument cluster when a trailer is connected stating that the system has been turned off due to a trailer connect. Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer screen? Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or cargo rack with electrical lighting, then the length will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert will remain on for trailers 3 ft (1 m) or less. If no, the Blind Spot Information System turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. • Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? Note: Proper measurement and measurement entry is required for Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow to function as designed. If no, the Blind Spot Information System turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. • Enter length of trailer: The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m). Toggling up or down using the menu buttons will increase/decrease the measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select the length so that the value is equal to or within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured length. For example, if the actual measured length is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When the length has been entered, the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow setup is saved. The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow only supports conventional trailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck is selected, the system automatically turns off. • Trailer length measurement: Trailer width measurement: 255 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids System Operation Large box trailers may cause false alerts to trigger when driving next to buildings or near parking cars. A false alert may also occur while making a 90-degree turn. If you select a trailer in the display screen prior to connecting the trailer, the system will load that configuration and the information cluster displays a message when the trailer is connected. A second message appears stating Cross Traffic Alert has been turned off; the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow still functions normally when driving forward. Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at the front and have a total length greater than 20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts from passing vehicles when the vehicle is passing at high speed. A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) may cause early alerts when you are over taking a vehicle. If no trailer has been set up and a trailer is connected, the instrument cluster provides a message indicating a trailer is connected followed by a message asking to select a trailer from the existing list of trailers or to add a trailer. In order for the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow to function, an existing trailer must be selected or a new trailer must be added. If the request is ignored or if you exit the screen, a message appears prompting you that the system has been turned off due to a trailer connect. This message may not appear until your vehicle speed reaches 22 mph (35 km/h). When towing a clam shell or V-Nose box trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m), delayed alerts on merging vehicles that are traveling the same speed as your vehicle may occur. System Errors If the system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the telltale illuminates and a message appears in the display screen. See Information Messages (page 129). The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow activates when driving forward for that particular trailer set up. If the ignition is cycled, the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow continues to function using the last trailer selected. Switching the System Off and On You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot Information System off in the display screen. See General Information (page 113). When the Blind Spot Information System switches off, you do not receive alerts and the display screen shows a system off message. The telltale in the cluster also illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot Information System on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. Trailer Considerations The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow is designed to work with any trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less and total length from the trailer hitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft (10.1 m) or less. Different trailers may cause a slight change in performance as outlined below. Note: The Blind Spot Information System remembers the last selected on or off setting. You can also have the Blind Spot Information System switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off permanently, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. 256 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Using the System Equipped) Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic Alert turns off. WARNING Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving. Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect vehicles that approach the rear of your vehicle with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. Note: When a trailer is detected, Cross Traffic Alert automatically turns off. In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone coverage to the right is nearly maximized. Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in reverse (R). E142440 Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely limited. 257 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids E142441 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts E231384 The system uses radar sensors that are located in the tail lamp on each side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas, this can cause degraded system performance. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). If the Blind Spot Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A Cross Traffic Alert blocked message appears in the display screen when the transmission is shifted into reverse (R). E142442 The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also sounds an audible alert and a message appears in the display screen indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse sensing system that sounds its own series of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 235). 258 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids System Limitations System Errors Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations; situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection and cause false alerts. If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with the left or right sensor a message appears in the display screen. See Information Messages (page 129). Switching the System Off and On The following are other situations that may limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance: • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors. • Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph (12 km/h). • Backing out of an angled parking spot. Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on whenever the ignition is switched on and ready to provide appropriate alerts when the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross Traffic Alert will not remember the last selected on or off setting. You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert off in the information display. See General Information (page 113). When you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you do not receive alerts and the display screen shows a system off message. False Alerts Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a factory equipped trailer tow module and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross Traffic Alert performance. You can also have Cross Traffic Alert switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off permanently, the system can only be switched back on at an authorized dealer. Note: The system may illuminate the amber alert indicator and sound the audible alert during heavy rain even though no vehicle is approaching from left or right. To help prevent damage to the power steering system: • Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than three seconds when the engine is running. • Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir). • Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer. STEERING Power Steering There may be certain instances when there is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert system that illuminates the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are temporary and self-correct. 259 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids • • The adaptive steering system continually changes the steering ratio with changes to vehicle speed, optimizing the steering response in all conditions. The system also changes when you switch on the transmission tow/haul feature. When you select the tow/haul button, the adaptive steering system reduces vehicle sensitivity to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds, while maintaining the ease of parking and maneuverability at low speeds. Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer. Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir. If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. Note: The adaptive steering system is designed with a locking device. With the lock engaged, the adaptive steering system remains mechanically locked at a fixed steering ratio. You may also notice a click when you switch the vehicle on or after you switch it off, as the lock disengages or engages. If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • an improperly inflated tire • uneven tire wear • loose or worn suspension components • loose or worn steering components • improper vehicle alignment Note: If your vehicle loses electrical power or detects a fault when you are driving, the system automatically shuts down and you retain normal steering function with a fixed steering ratio. During this time it is possible that the steering wheel may not be straight when the vehicle is driving straight ahead. In addition, the driver may notice that the steering wheel angle required to steer the vehicle may be different. If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut. Torque fasteners to specifications. A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. Note: During parking maneuvers, the adaptive steering system balances the driver work load for various steering wheel inputs and vehicle loading conditions. Under extreme operating conditions the system locking device may engage. This strategy prevents overheating and permanent damage to the adaptive steering system. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. Adaptive Steering (If Equipped) Note: The adaptive steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected a message displays in the information display. If a red warning message displays, stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. The message may clear if the fault is no longer present. If an adaptive steering system warning message appears each time you start your vehicle, have the system checked as soon as possible. 260 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If Equipped) Principle Of Operation (If Equipped) WARNINGS This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle. E156131 When your vehicle rapidly approaches another vehicle, a red warning light flashes and a tone sounds. The brake support system assists you in reducing any collision speed by pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of collision continues to increases after the audio-visual warning, the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking. The system does not automatically activate the brakes, but if the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the brakes apply full stopping power. The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to replace your judgment and the need to maintain correct distance and speed. Note: The system does not detect, warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of your vehicle. Note: The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). Using the Collision Warning System Note: The collision warning system will be unavailable if you disable the electronic stability control. See Using Stability Control (page 231). The collision warning system’s brake support reduces collision speed only if you brake your vehicle before any collision. As in any typical braking situation, you must press your brake pedal. WARNING You can use your information display control to adjust the collision warning system's sensitivity or to turn the system On or Off. Your vehicle will remember these settings across key cycles. You may change the collision warning system sensitivity to any one of three possible settings. See General Information (page 113). E156130 The system alerts you of certain collision risks. The system's sensor detects your vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles traveling in the same direction as your vehicle. 261 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids Note: It is recommended that you turn the collision warning system off if a snow plow or similar object is installed in such a way that it may block the radar sensor. Your vehicle will remember the selected setting across key cycles. Blocked Sensors Note: When possible, the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced sensitivity causes fewer and later system warnings. See General Information (page 113). E183741 If a blocked sensor message appears in the information display, dirt, water, or an object is blocking the sensor. The sensor is located behind a cover near the driver side of the lower grille. If anything blocks the sensor, your vehicle cannot see through the sensor, and the collision warning system will not work. Possible causes for the blocked sensor message and corrective actions are listed below. Cause Action The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty or obstructed Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the obstruction The surface of the radar sensor cover is clean but the message remains in the display Wait a short time. The radar may take several minutes to reset after you remove the obstruction Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air interferes with the radar signals The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically reactivates Swirling water, snow or ice on the road surface interferes with the radar signals The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically reactivates 262 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Aids System Limitations WARNING The collision warning system’s brake support only reduces collision speed if you first apply your brakes. You must brake as you would in any typical braking situation. Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances where vehicles do not provide a collision warning. These include: • • • • • • • Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph (10 km/h). Pedestrians or objects in the roadway. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane. Severe weather conditions (see blocked sensor section). Debris build-up on the grille near the headlamps (see blocked sensor section). Small distance to vehicle ahead. Large steering wheel and pedal movements (very active driving style). Damage to the front end of your vehicle may alter the radar sensor's coverage area. This may result in missed or false collision warnings. Have an authorized dealer check your radar sensor for proper coverage and operation. 263 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying LOAD LIMIT Tire and Loading Label Information Example: Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer This section guides you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label. E198719 Payload PAYLOAD E143816 264 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. 265 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) Safety Compliance Certification Label Example: GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. E198828 WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification label. 266 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. WARNINGS Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to your vehicle, personal injury or both. Steps for determining the correct load limit: 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have 267 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. BED RAMPS (If Equipped) WARNINGS When sliding the ramp up or down, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Make sure that you correctly install the ramp to the tailgate plate. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 268 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying WARNINGS Do not step or sit on the ramp when it is in the stowed position. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Only install the ramp within the prescribed ramp angles. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Note: The ramp maximum capacity is 800 lb (363 kg). E211150 4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the open position. Note: You can use a smooth surface tool to rotate the stops. Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground before usage. Note: For loading and unloading equipment, your ramp should be set between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees downward to avoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgate plate. Note: When using your vehicle for off-road operation, remove the bed ramps from the vehicle and store them in a safe location away from your vehicle. Using the Bed Ramp 1. Remove the front and rear cables. E194382 5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate plate. E194380 2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew the cam bolts. 3. Remove the ramp from the ramp holder. 269 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Load Carrying E194391 5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder. 6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam lever arms. 7. Attach the front and rear cables. Note: Make sure you properly secure the locking cable. If the locking cable is unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise. Installing the Ramp Holder E194383 6. Pull the location pin outward and extend the ramp until the pin is seated in the usage position, then set the ramp on even ground. Stowing the Bed Ramp 1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin outward. 2. Slide the ramp into the storage position until the location pin locks. Note: Make sure the proper pin location has been applied for your bed size. E194387 1. 3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate plate. 4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the closed position. 270 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Hook the top of the ramp holder over the mounting plate and rotate the ramp holder into position. Load Carrying E194388 2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards into the installed position. 3. Tighten the ramp holder nut. Note: The nut should be on the upper stud. 271 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: To prevent your trailer from accumulating distance, and the trailer information status appearing when you restart your vehicle after disconnecting your trailer, you must deactivate your trailer. Using the information display, go to the Towing menu and then the Select Trailer option. Select the No active trailer option. See Information Displays (page 113). Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See Fuses (page 317). Your vehicle may have ability to modify trailer towing features. See General Information (page 113). Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation. TOWING A TRAILER WARNINGS Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Do not exceed the lowest rating capacity for your vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading your vehicle or trailer hitch can impair your vehicle stability and handling. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating. 272 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual. See Load Limit (page 264). You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. • Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. • Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ 273 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Principle of Operation TRAILER REVERSING AIDS Trailer reverse guidance is a driver assistance feature that helps take the guesswork out of getting your trailer positioned where you want it, quickly and easily, when driving in reverse (R). Trailer Reverse Guidance WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Each trailer you use with your vehicle has to be setup once. Sticker placement is extremely important and there are specific placement rules. Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer information when you enter it into the system. A maximum of 10 trailers can be added to the system. Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer Note: You must always be aware of the vehicle and trailer combination and the surrounding environment. Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect the electrical wiring harness. Check to make sure that the wiring is working. See Essential Towing Checks (page 286). Note: The system does not detect or prevent the vehicle or trailer from making contact with obstacles in the surrounding environment. Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a level surface. Note: Keep in mind that the front end of the vehicle swings out when changing the direction of the trailer. Note: The system relies on user measurements to determine sticker placement and system limits. It is critical to take the key measurements correctly. Incorrect measurements can result in the improper function of the system up to and including contact between the vehicle and trailer. E209759 Make sure that the trailer and truck are in line with each other. You can do this by putting the truck in drive (D) and pulling straight forward. Note: The system limits vehicle speed when backing up. The system is not a replacement for proper use of the throttle and brake pedals. Note: Some features associated with this system do not work until you set it up. E209760 274 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing 8. A message appears in the information display asking if you want to add trailer reverse guidance. Select Yes to continue. 9. Straighten out the trailer, if necessary. 10. The information display directs you to the quick start guide for how to proceed. The steps are also shown here. Step 2: Follow the Information Display Prompts 1. Use the steering wheel controls to navigate to the towing menu. 2. Select Trailer Setup from the available options. 3. Select Add a Trailer and press OK to confirm. 4. The system asks you to name the trailer. Use the steering wheel controls to choose from the alphanumeric characters. Press the right arrow to advance to the next character. When you finish naming the trailer, press OK to confirm. 5. Select the type of brake system for your trailer. Select DEFAULT if your trailer has electric, surge or no brakes. Press OK to select and advance to the next screen Note: The default option is low. This is recommended for most trailers. If the trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, or if you prefer more aggressive braking, then select the other options as required. Step 3: Placing the Target Place the entire sticker in the gray zone on the trailer outlined in the diagram. The sticker is in the back cover pocket of the quick start guide. Note: An assistant can help to carry out the following procedure. Note: Make sure nothing obstructs the rear view cameras view of the sticker. For example, items such as a jack handle or wiring. Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and clean horizontal surface. For best results apply the sticker when temperatures are above 32°F (0°C). 6. The system asks you to select your trailer type. You can use the system with conventional, fifth wheel and goose neck trailers. For fifth wheel and goose neck trailers, set up and sticker placement are not required, however some of the features do not operate automatically with these trailer types. Use the steering wheel controls to select your trailer type. Note: You can still manually control the camera views on the touchscreen to help you reverse goose neck and fifth wheel trailers. 7. Note: Do not move stickers after they are placed. Do not re-use any stickers if removed. E224482 If your vehicle includes a blind spot information system, the system prompts you to setup the trailer blind spot feature. See Blind Spot Information System (page 252). 275 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Use the supplied measurement card, a tape measure and pen to carefully mark the area where to attach the sticker. The sticker is supplied in the back cover pocket of your quick start guide. Make sure the entire sticker is within the gray zone between the two arcs or distance markers on the diagram, and is also visible in the rear view camera display. It should be between 7–20 in (17–51 cm) from the trailer ball hitch. Once you have found the correct location, place the sticker. Step 4: Take Measurements E231167 After you place the sticker on the trailer you must take some measurements. Distance A Note: You must take accurate measurements for the system to operate properly. The horizontal distance from the license plate to the center of the ball hitch on the trailer. Note: Round measurement figures to the nearest half inch. Distance B The horizontal distance from the center of the ball hitch to the center of the sticker. Note: Round upward if the measured length is a quarter inch or greater. Round downward if the measure length is less than a quarter inch. For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would be rounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm). Distance C The distance from the rear view camera to the center of the sticker. Distance D Note: Use consistent metric or imperial units as required by your country or vehicle. The distance from the tailgate to the center of the trailer axle (single axle trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers with dual axles or more). The measurement card requires you to record four key distances (A, B, C, D). Record the trailer name for these measurements. 276 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the Information Display Note: For best results, do not calibrate the system at night. Using the measurements you recorded, enter the required data into the system. Follow the on screen prompts to enter each of the measurements taken in step 4. Use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the numbers as necessary. Press OK to confirm each measurement. Once you add the last measurement, the information display shows all of the entered measurements. You can choose to confirm or change the measurements. Using Trailer Reverse Guidance 1. Shift into reverse (R). Press the rear camera button to expand the menu. 2. Press the trailer icon. 3. Select the applicable trailer in the information display. 4. When in trailer reverse guidance mode, you can see the camera view on the side your trailer is moving, or both sides when the trailer is straight behind you. When the views change with the trailer direction, it is called auto mode. For example, if you turn the trailer to the right, you see the right side of your vehicle and trailer. You can switch this view manually at any time by using the arrow keys. To return to auto mode, press the auto button. Note: Auto mode is the default setting. Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location Check the rear view camera display to see if the system identifies the sticker. The system marks the sticker with a red circle. Confirm that the red circle shows over the sticker image in the rear view camera display. Note: If the system cannot locate the sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make sure the sticker is within the zone as indicated in step 3. Use the view that helps you the most when reversing your vehicle and trailer. Normal rear view camera view. Use this feature when you want to see your trailer hitch or what is directly behind your vehicle. The information display shows a confirmation message when you successfully confirm the target. E263194 Calibrating the System Straight back-up mode. Use this feature when you want to keep E224484 your trailer completely in line with your truck. In this mode, a steering wheel graphic shows you which way to turn your steering wheel to keep your trailer straight. To complete setup, drive your vehicle straight forward between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h), as directed by the information display. Note: Keep the steering wheel straight during the calibration process. If the steering wheel is in a turned position, the calibration pauses. The information display prompts you to drive straight forward to complete the calibration. Note: It may be helpful to shift your vehicle into drive (D), pull forward and straighten out the vehicle and trailer before engaging straight back-up mode. The information display shows a message during calibration and after calibration is complete Left and right arrows let you see other views regardless of your trailer angle. Use them to switch views manually. 277 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: If you're using a fifth wheel or goose neck trailer, or if you have not set up the trailer reverse guidance system, auto view is not available. When you turn the steering wheel, a small representation shows you two zones to warn you of a possible jackknife condition. The view shows your truck and trailer position and provides visual feedback to help avoid a jackknife condition entirely. To change your view, use the arrows. You can see the following views: • • • • • The yellow zone warns you of a potential jackknife position. When you enter into this zone, it is recommended to put your vehicle back into drive (D) and pull forward. Moving forward helps put the truck and trailer back into an in-line position. Full driver. Partial driver. 50/50. Partial passenger. Full passenger. E224485 The red zone indicates that you need to put the truck into drive (D) and pull forward immediately. Zoom. Use this feature to zoom in the camera view. Troubleshooting Return. Ths feature takes you back to the 360-degree camera E224486 system and out of the trailer reverse guidance feature. E224487 Note: The system requires a clear view of the sticker placed on the trailer. You must keep the camera lens and sticker clean for the system to operate correctly. Auto. Ths feature returns you to auto view. Setup In addition to multiple view options, your touchscreen adds some features to give you more information. For example, after setting up a conventional trailer, the display shows a small top-view representation of your truck and trailer. The system is designed to be used with a wide variety of trailers. However, there are some trailers that do not have a proper surface and location to mount the sticker. These trailers are not supported. Attempts to place the sticker on a surface that does not meet the sticker placement requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup instruction, or entering inaccurate measurements to proceed through setup can result in improper system function. This representation shows two, different-colored lines: A black line shows you where your trailer is in relation to your vehicle. A white line gives you a projection of where your trailer may go based on your current steering wheel position Accurate measurements are critical to correct system function. If you need to check measurements or change them, you can access them through the trailer menus in the information display. Choose the option to change the sticker from the change trailer settings menu. It is not necessary to remove the sticker if you are just reviewing or changing measurements. Note: When you move the steering wheel, the white line indicates where the trailer may go based on your steering wheel input. When you turn your steering wheel to the left, the trailer moves to the right. When you turn your steering wheel to the right, the trailer moves to the left. 278 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing The following menu warnings or difficulties may occur during setup. Tips to resolve them are listed below. Measurement C has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure you follow the sticker placement instructions in step 3 of the setup. Stickers placed outside the allowed zone adversely affect the system performance and could cause improper feature function. If you have met all the criteria for sticker placement and you see this message, the sticker is either too far below or too close to the camera to properly recognize the sticker. In order for the system to correctly operate, the sticker height must be lowered if you receive the minimum warning or the sticker height must be raised if you receive the maximum warning. • Only one sticker can be placed on the trailer for correct system function. The previous sticker must be removed or covered so only one sticker is visible to the camera. • Measurement B and C must be measured again if a new sticker is placed on the trailer. Measurement A has reached maximum or minimum value: • The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9–16 in (229–406 mm) when installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars that have a length outside this range as system performance degrades and could cause improper system function. • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from license plate and the hitch ball center. A straight line distance that includes any vertical rise or drop increases the measurement and makes it inaccurate. Inaccurate measurements degrade system performance and could cause improper system function. See step 4 of the setup instruction to review the measurement instructions. Measurement B has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure you follow the sticker placement instruction in step 3 of the setup. Stickers placed outside the allowed zone adversely affect the system performance and could cause improper feature function. • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from center of sticker to the hitch ball center. A straight line distance that includes any vertical rise or drop increases the measurement and causes an inaccurate value to be entered into the system. See step 4 of the setup for additional measurement instructions. Measurement D has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from tailgate to the center of the single axle or the center of all the axles on the trailer. See step 4 of the setup for additional measurement instructions. The system does not support trailer lengths outside the range allowed by the information display. 279 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing The system is not available: • The system relies on many sub-systems in your vehicle to correctly operate. If those sub-systems are not correctly operating, the system may not be available. • Low battery voltage is one condition which prevents the system from operating. Please make sure the battery is correctly charged if the system is not available. • You may need to drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) before the system is available again. • If the message still displays, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. System is circling something beside the sticker or system cannot find the sticker: • Make sure the rear camera is clean and the sticker is clearly visible in the camera image. Clean the camera and sticker if necessary. • The camera system uses the entered measurements to help locate the sticker. Inaccurate sticker measurements degrade the system's ability to locate the sticker. Verify the measurements entered into the system are accurate. • Remove the incorrectly circled label or decal if possible. • If you cannot resolve the issue, a new sticker location should be tried. The new sticker location must meet the requirements noted in step 3 of the setup instructions. Only one sticker can be placed on the trailer for correct system function. The previous sticker must be removed or covered so only one sticker is visible to the camera. Sticker lost: • Check for the following if you receive the lost sticker message when using the system. • Stop your vehicle as soon as the message displays. • Make sure the sticker is visible in the rear view camera image. • Clean the sticker and camera to make sure they are unobstructed. • Remove any items that may be blocking the view of the sticker. Depending on your trailer configuration and any equipment mounted to your trailer, it is possible for the sticker to be blocked from the view of the camera as it rotates on the hitch ball, but not be blocked during setup. Remove the obstruction if possible. It may be necessary to Calibration The system monitors various vehicle parameters to ensure your vehicle is being driven straight and the trailer straight behind your vehicle. Any steering input or trailer movement pauses the calibration. For best results: • Use a long, straight and smooth road when attempting to calibrate. • Drive straight forward. • Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h). System Operation The following warnings or difficulties may occur during feature operation. Tips to resolve them are listed below. 280 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing • • • remove the sticker from its current location if the obstruction cannot be cleared. Place a new sticker that is visible to the camera in all positions of the trailer behind your vehicle. You can change your sticker location by going into the trailer menu, selecting trailer options, selecting change trailer settings and then selecting the change sticker option. The previous sticker must be removed. ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER FOR CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION. The camera system uses the entered measurements to help locate the sticker. Inaccurate measurements reduce the system’s ability to locate the sticker. Check the measurements entered into the system are correct. Refer to the step 4 of trailer reverse guidance setup for instructions on measurements. You can change your measurement by going into the trailer menu, selecting trailer options, selecting change trailer setting and then selecting the change sticker option. Disregard the prompt to remove this sticker and continue to the next step if you only plan to update the measurements for the current sticker location. slowly turning the wheel until the trailer is following your desired path and then holding the wheel in that position. If you would like to recalibrate the system for straight backing, you can do so with the following procedure. • Go into the trailer menu, select trailer options, select change trailer setting and then select the change sticker option. Your saved measurements show. Do not change them, but continue to confirm measurements. Once you confirm the measurements, the system then prompts you to perform the calibration procedure. Note: The system is designed to be used with the same trailer connection every time the trailer is chosen from the selection menu. Using a different drawbar or a different pin hole, on drawbars with more than one pin hole, when connecting the drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer measurements. Take the measurements again and update if required. TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation. System does not backup straight: • Factors such as the drawbar connection to the hitch receiver, road camber, road grade and compliance in the trailer suspension can influence how straight the system is able to reverse your trailer when the wheel is not turned. You can compensate for the trailer drifting to the right or left by Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins. Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying. 281 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer2 frontal2 area. Do not exceed 60 ft (5.6 m ) trailer frontal area for conventional 2 trailers. Do not exceed 75 ft (6.9 2 m ) trailer frontal area for fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers. Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy. Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point. Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as your vehicle's electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes. Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight calculated using the formula following the chart. Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed. This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display. The first thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution. See Load Carrying (page 264). RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS WARNING You must use the heavy-duty drawbar pin supplied with your vehicle when using the heavy-duty hitch. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Note: Vehicles with a heavy-duty hitch must use the drawbar pin stamped 21,000 LBS. You can obtain a replacement drawbar pin at your authorized dealer. 282 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Pickup and box delete Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR 3.73 19,500 lb (8,845 kg) 4.30 22,000 lb (9,979 kg) 6.7L diesel 3.31, 3.55 23,500 lb (10,660 kg) 1 3.31, 3.55 25,700 lb (11,657 kg) 3.73 19,500 lb (8,845 kg) 4.30 23,000 lb (10,433 kg) 3.31, 3.55 28,700 lb (13,018 kg) 3.73 20,000 lb (9,072 kg) 4.30 23,500 lb (10,660 kg) 3.55 36,000 lb (16,329 kg) 4.10 40,000 lb (18,144 kg) 4.30 42,800 lb (19,414 kg) Vehicle Engine 6.2L gas F-250 6.7L diesel 6.2L gas F-350 single rear wheel 6.7L diesel 6.2L gas F-350 dual rear wheel 6.7L diesel F-450 1 Trailer 6.7L diesel Tow Package. 283 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Chassis cab Vehicle F-350 single rear wheel Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR 3.73 19,500 lb (8,845 kg) 4.30 23,000 lb (10,433 kg) 3.73 26,500 lb (12,020 kg) 3.73 20,000 lb (9,072 kg) 4.30 23,500 lb (10,660 kg) 3.73 31,000 lb (14,062 kg) 4.10 32,000 lb (14,515 kg) 4.88 28,000 lb (12,701 kg) 4.10 32,000 lb (14,515 kg) 4.30 34,500 lb 1 (15,649 kg) 4.88 28,000 lb (12,701 kg) 4.10 32,000 lb (14,515 kg) 4.30 35,000 lb (15,876 kg) 6.2L gas 6.7L diesel 6.2L gas F-350 dual rear wheel 6.7L diesel 6.8L gas F-450 dual rear wheel 6.7L diesel 6.8L gas F-550 dual rear wheel (17500/ 18000 lb GVWR) 6.7L diesel 284 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Chassis cab Vehicle F-550 dual rear wheel (19000/ 19500 lb GVWR) 1 Requires Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR 6.8L gas 4.88 28,000 lb (12,701 kg) 4.88 32,000 lb (14,515 kg) 4.88 40,000 lb 1 (18,144 kg) 6.7L diesel optional GCWR Package. • Payload, cargo and luggage weight. • Aftermarket equipment weight. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination. Note: The trailer tongue load is considered part of the payload for your vehicle. Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight. Note: Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure. For additional information on trailer weights, reference the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle 1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model and axle ratio. See the previous chart. 2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle: • Vehicle curb weight. • Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight distributing hardware. • Driver weight. • Passenger(s) weight. RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ 285 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Trailer Towing Connector ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS WARNING Do not exceed the maximum vertical load on the tow ball. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). • Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. • See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. • Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). • If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. E163167 When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions. Some seven-position connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo, which confirms that it is the proper wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle. Color Function Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp White Ground (-) Blue Electric brakes Green Right turn signal and stop lamp Vehicles with a diesel engine have an engine braking feature. See General Information (page 225). Orange Battery (+) Brown Running lights Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. Grey Reverse lights See Load Limits in the Load Carrying chapter for load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and instructions on calculating your vehicle's load. Some vehicles will have the ability to modify trailer towing features. See General Information (page 113). 286 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a factory brake controller, the Battery (+) Orange wire is powered when you start the engine and you apply the brakes at least once when a trailer with brake lamps is connected. If your vehicle is not equipped with a factory brake controller, relays control the system and it becomes active when you power on your vehicle. A B C D E Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View Camera System Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist you in setting your steering wheel properly to help align the trailer hitch and tongue. F E142436 A Active guidelines. B Centerline. C Fixed guideline: Green zone. D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone. E Fixed guideline: Red zone. F Rear bumper. Fixed guidelines are always shown in the display, but the active guidelines only display when the steering wheel is turned. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position is changed while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. 287 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Installing a 3 Inch Drawbar with 3/4 Inch Pin Hole The active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight. Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. Refer to the Rear View Camera section for additional information. See Rear View Camera (page 236). Hitches Note: On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch provided on this vehicle enhances crash protection for the fuel system. Do not remove! Note: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify trailer hitches. Modifying trailer hitches can reduce hitch rating. E247903 The pin sleeve should be inserted in the 3/4 inch pin hole of the 3 inch drawbar. Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10-15% for conventional towing or 15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. Hitch Components (If Equipped) The following components are required. Some are provided in certain vehicles. • • • A trailer hitch with a 3 inch receiver and 5/8 inch hitch pin rated to tow up to 21,000 lb (9,525 kg). A hitch pin sleeve stored in the glove box to be used when mounting the 3 inch drawbar. A cotter pin to help keep the hitch pin in place. E247902 Remove reducers before inserting the 3 inch drawbar. Insert the drawbar into hitch receiver. 288 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing 3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars connected. 4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender a second time. This is H2. 5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender is approximately halfway between H1 and H2. 6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2-6. Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle: • Lock the bar tension adjuster in place. • Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch. • Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer. E247909 Put the 5/8 inch hitch pin through pin hole. Place the cotter pin around the neck of hitch pin. Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped) Weight-distributing Hitches Note: The mounting pads in the bed are specifically designed for certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches. Do not use these mounting pads for other purposes. WARNING Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury. Note: Contact an authorized dealer to purchase gooseneck and fifth-wheel hitches that are compatible with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with a fifth-wheel prep package. This package enables your vehicle to accept certain fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch attaches to the four mounting pads in the pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring connector may be in the bed as well. The gooseneck ball hitch is a separate mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch, located in the center of the bed. When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use the following procedure: 1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface. 2. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender. This is H1. 289 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less clearance between the cab and the fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer compared to longer box pick-ups, such as an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is critical to check that this combination provides clearance between the front of the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to 90 degrees. Failure to follow this recommendation could result in the trailer contacting the cab of the tow vehicle during tight turns that are typical during low-speed parking and turning maneuvers. This contact could result in damage to the trailer and tow vehicle. Note: If you install the hook with the latch facing toward the rear of your vehicle, you may not be able to fully close the safety chain hook latch. If this occurs, install the hook with the latch facing toward the front of your vehicle. Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. Safety Chains Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Always connect the safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer hitch. The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped) WARNINGS The anti-lock brake system does not control the trailer brakes. Use the integrated trailer brake controller to properly adjust the trailer brakes and check all connections before towing a trailer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E265060 If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch, make sure the latch is fully closed. 290 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: The integrated Ford brake controller is compatible with trailers equipped with electric-actuated drum brakes and electric-over hydraulic brake systems. A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts the controller's power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises or lowers the setting continuously. The gain setting displays in the message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X. Note: The integrated Ford brake controller does not control hydraulic surge-style brakes. B: Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to switch on the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle's. See the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. E183395 • When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake pressure. Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever lights both the trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps. Trailer brake control messages appear in the information display as follows: • TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting. • TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / / / /: Displays when braking. The bars indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes. • TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a correct trailer wiring connection. • TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a trailer disconnection. You can adjust the amount of initial trailer brake output by selecting one of three settings through the message center. Ford has tested the trailer brake controller to be compatible with several major brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for information on which brands you can use. The controller user interface consists of the following: Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake Controller Effort Choose either the electric option for trailers with electromagnetic drum brakes, or the electric over hydraulic option for trailers with these brake systems. 291 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Trailer Brake Effort Setting 4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good starting point for heavier loads. 5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control lever completely. 6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10. The trailer brake controller allows the user to customize how aggressively the trailer brakes engage. The default value is the low setting and is the recommended setting for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, or if you prefer more aggressive trailer braking, then select either the medium or the high setting. Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake Controller Mode Choose the low, medium or high setting for the required initial trailer brake output. Procedure for Adjusting Gain Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h). Information Display Warning Messages The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake controller for the specific towing condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather. Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer. The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability. TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT Displays in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single tone. If this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but with degraded performance. 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary. 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions. 3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a confirmation message appears in the information display. WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER Displays when there is a short circuit on the electric brake output wire. If this message displays, with no trailer connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact an authorized dealer. 292 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing If the message only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be drawing too much current. • • Points to Remember Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result. • • • • • • Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller. Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road, weather, trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when the gain was initially set. Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle. Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle. The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only active when applying the brakes using your vehicle's brake pedal, not the controller. The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on different road conditions. Your vehicle's brake system and the trailer brake system work independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle's brakes. When you switch the engine off, the controller output is disabled and the display and module shut down. Trailer Lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles. 293 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing When Towing a Trailer • • • • • • • • • Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi (800 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Steering and you have enabled Tow/Haul, the Adaptive Steering system adjusts the steering response to match your vehicle’s load. The system reduces vehicle sensitivity to steering inputs at higher vehicle speeds while it maintains the ease of parking and maneuverability at low speeds. • • • If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while towing may reduce this tendency. If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant (if the axle is not already filled with it). Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade: 1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow. 2. Set your vehicle parking brake. 3. Place the transmission in park (P). 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included with vehicle.) Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare tire. A "temporary" spare tire is different in size (diameter or width), tread-type (All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using. Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC) Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after you remove the trailer from the water. 294 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Emergency Towing When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Place the transmission in neutral (N). If you cannot move the transmission into neutral (N), you may need to override it. See Transmission (page 208). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km). Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • Causing internal damage to the components. • Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required. WARNING If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Recreational Towing WARNING Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 146). If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing, such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We have designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. Two-wheel Drive Vehicles Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot tow your vehicle. 295 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing Note: If you do not see the message in the display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped with a Manual-shift Transfer Case 1. Put the transmission in neutral (N). 2. Put the transfer case in neutral (N). 3. Put the hub locks in the FREE position. Always make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position. Note: You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts into its neutral position. This is normal. 6. Leave the transmission in neutral (N) and turn the ignition as far as it will go toward the off position (it will not turn fully off when the transmission is in neutral). If your vehicle has an ignition key, you must leave the key in the ignition while towing. To lock and unlock your vehicle, use the keyless entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. You do not need to leave your keys in the vehicle. You can lock and unlock your vehicle as you normally do. 7. Release the brake pedal. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped with an Electronic-shift Transfer Case Only tow a four-wheel drive vehicle that has an electronic-shift transfer case with all wheels on the ground. To do this, place the transfer case in its neutral position and engage the four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform the steps in the following section after positioning your vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly securing them together. Note: Make sure you properly secure your vehicle to the tow vehicle. WARNINGS Do not disconnect the battery during recreational towing. It prevents the transfer case from shifting properly and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). Four-wheel-down Towing 1. Put the ignition in the on position, but do not start the engine. If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to 2H. 4. Shift the transmission to neutral (N). 5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five times within seven seconds. Note: If completed successfully, the information display shows a message indicating that your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground. Shifting the transfer case to its neutral position for recreational towing may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). It may injure the driver and others. Make sure you press the foot brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe position when you shift to neutral (N). Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its neutral position while towing with all four wheels on the ground will damage vehicle components. 296 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Towing 7. Note: You can check four-wheel-down towing status at any time by opening the driver's door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on position and verifying a message displays in the cluster. If the transfer case does not successfully shift out of neutral (N), set the parking brake until you can have your vehicle serviced. Resolving the Shift Delay Issue To exit four-wheel-down towing and return the transfer case to its 2H position: If the instrument cluster displays a shift delay message, See Information Messages (page 129). You need to perform the following steps: 1. With your vehicle still properly secured to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in the on position, but do not start the engine. If your vehicle has an ignition key, switch the key to on. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission out of neutral (N) and into any other gear. 4. Release the brake pedal. Note: If completed successfully, the 2H indicator light illuminates and a confirmation message displays in the instrument cluster. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Put the transmission into neutral (N), and then start the engine. 3. With the engine running, shift the transmission to drive (D) and let the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m). You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. 4. When the issue is resolved, the instrument cluster displays a message stating neutral tow is disabled. Note: If the indicator light and message do not display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning. Note: You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. Note: If a message displays in the instrument cluster stating there is a shift delay, transfer case gear tooth blockage may be present. See Resolving the Shift Delay Issue after this section. 5. Apply the parking brake and disconnect the vehicle from the tow vehicle. 6. Release the parking brake, start the engine and shift the transmission to drive (D) to make sure the transfer case is out of neutral (N). 297 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Hints BREAKING-IN • You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. • • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. Use the recommended engine oil. Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel economy: • Sudden accelerations or hard accelerations. • Revving the engine before turning it off. • Idle for periods longer than one minute. • Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Use the air conditioner or front defroster. • Use the speed control in hilly terrain. • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer. • Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of weight carried). • Driving with the wheels out of alignment. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km) before towing a trailer. Make sure you use the specified engine oil. See Capacities and Specifications (page 427). Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during the first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. These additives may prevent piston ring seating. ECONOMICAL DRIVING Your fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under, and how you maintain your vehicle. You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these things in mind: • Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Drive at steady speeds without stopping. • Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. • Close the windows for high-speed driving. • Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed (if equipped). • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. 298 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Hints • • • • • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 5–10 mi (12–16 km) of driving. Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. Close the windows for high-speed driving. When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: • • • • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. FLOOR MATS WARNINGS Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs. Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. E176913 299 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Hints • • E142666 To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure. SNOWPLOWING Ford recommends that the Super Duty F-Series used for snow removal include the snowplow package option. • Installing the Snowplow Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow are in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, snowplow section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical installation affects the following: • • 300 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity (TARC) is on the lower right side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This applies to Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR or less. This is the weight of permanently-attached auxiliary equipment, such as snowplow frame-mounting hardware, that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification responsibility. The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for customer convenience. Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for proper braking and steering. Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature uneven tire wear. Specifications are in the Ford Workshop Manual. Headlight aim may require re-adjustment. Driving Hints • • Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Vehicle The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are on the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation pressure for the tire and associated load rating is on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow installation. Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your authorized dealer for additional information. WARNINGS Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) or its fuses. Contact an authorized dealer. Additional equipment for example snowplow equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelt, even when provided with an airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS). Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until you have driven at least 500 mi (800 km). Ford recommends vehicle speed does not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when snowplowing. Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag supplemental restraint system. The supplemental restraint system will activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient frontal deceleration. The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may cause the engine to run at a higher temperature: Attention to engine temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle provides the best performance. Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow that results in sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbags. Such driving also increases the risk of accidents. Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible airbag deployment. Follow the severe duty schedule in your Scheduled Maintenance information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals. Engine temperature while plowing When driving with a plow, your engine may run at a higher temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to the radiator. 301 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Driving Hints • • If you are driving more than 15 mi (24 km) at temperatures above freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide maximum airflow to the radiator. If you are driving less than 15 mi (24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph (72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade position to provide maximum airflow. Transmission operation while plowing WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. • • • Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h). Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until the engine is at idle and the wheels have stopped. 302 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies • ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24 hours a day, seven days a week. • For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. • Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. 303 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance The flasher control is on the instrument panel. Use your hazard flashers when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. • • Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction indicators flash. Press the button again to switch them off. FUEL SHUTOFF Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance WARNING Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment of your vehicle. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once the vehicle determines the systems are safe, then the vehicle allows you to restart. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact a qualified technician. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel to the engine in the event of a moderate to severe crash. Not every impact causes a shutoff. Should your vehicle shut off after a crash, you may restart your vehicle. HAZARD FLASHERS If your vehicle has a key system: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch to start position. 3. Switch off the ignition. 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the fuel pump. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery loses charge. As a result, there may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. 304 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies If your vehicle has a push button start system: 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP to switch on your vehicle. 3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal and START/STOP, or press START/STOP without pressing the brake pedal. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. Preparing Your Vehicle JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNINGS Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle. 305 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies Jump Starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately, or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 1 3 4 Removing the Jumper Cables 2 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 4 E142664 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available. 2 1 3 E142665 1. 306 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle. Roadside Emergencies 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery. 5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners. The horn and indicators turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. • Sounding of the horn is only enabled in specific markets. E143886 If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do not approve a slingbelt towing procedure. If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur. WARNINGS Block the wheels to help prevent the vehicle from moving. Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if you do not take these precautions. We produce a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive vehicle towed with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. 307 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. However, it is acceptable to use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle configuration, you perform the following before towing: WARNINGS Always slowly remove the slack from the recovery strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death. • Never link two straps together with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap breaks and can cause serious injury or death. • If your vehicle has a manual-shift transfer case, make sure the front wheel hub locks are in the FREE position before towing. If your vehicle has an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make sure you switch the four-wheel drive control to the 2H position before towing. Your vehicle comes equipped with frame-mounted front recovery hooks. These hooks should never have a load applied to them greater than the gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle. Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic transmission. Before using recovery hooks: • Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding the applied load. • Never use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends. • Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible cuts, tears or damage. • Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet draped over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event the strap breaks. • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label. Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause damage to the automatic transmission. Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing an outer rear wheel before towing. TOWING POINTS WARNINGS Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death. 308 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Roadside Emergencies • • Always align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line (within 10 degrees). Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching into their path. 309 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Website www.owner.ford.com Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Away From Home Telephone If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Website www.ford.ca In the United States: Twitter Mailing address @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 1. Additional information and resources are available online: 310 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer. Customer Assistance 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs first: In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt. Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 311 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. 312 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur fuel for diesel engines. If you cannot find the proper fuel recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. The use of improper fuels in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact the corresponding Ford Customer Assistance Center: CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Centers in: 313 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance Customer Relationship Center Phone Fax E-mail Asia Pacific N/A N/A apemcrc@ford.com Caribbean and Central America +1 313 594 4857 - expcac@ford.com 971 4 3327 266 menacac@ford.com Ford 80004443673 Lincoln 80004441067 Middle East UAE 80004441066 Saudi Arabia 8008443673 Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi 800850078 Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands +1-800-841-3673 N/A prcac@ford.com Sub-Saharan Africa +1-313-594-4857 N/A ssacrc@ford.com South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A infokr1@ford.com or infokr@lincoln.com If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Global Trade Services by emailing, expcso@ford.com. Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST 314 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. 315 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Customer Assistance Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English) Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French) Phone 1–800–333–0510 Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1–800–565-3673 316 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses The power distribution box is in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNINGS Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 353). To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. E252492 317 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 1 2 3 4 5 Fuse Rating 1 Powertrain control module. 1 Emissions - malfunction indicator lamp. 20A 20A 1 20A 20A Protected Components 1 1 15A Cooling fan. A/C compressor. Engine brake. Noise suppression cap. Mass air flow sensor. Emissions. Glow plugs. Urea. Compressed natural gas fuel control module. Fuel sensor. 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 — Not used. 9 — Not used. 10 11 12 1 15A — 40A — 14 — 15 16 Compressed natural gas relay. 2 13 Heated exterior mirrors. Heated rear window. Not used. Powertrain control module relay. 1 Horn. 1 A/C clutch relay power. 20A 10A 17 — Rear heated window and heated mirrors relay. 18 — Trailer park lamp relay. 19 — Not used. 318 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating Protected Components 20 — Supplemental air heater bank #1 relay. 21 — Not used. 22 — Not used. 23 — Not used. 24 — Cooling fan relay. Supplemental air heater bank #3 relay. 25 — Glow plug module power relay. 26 — Not used. 27 2 30A 28 — 29 — 30 31 32 33 34 Not used. Run-start relay. 1 10A 5A Trailer tow battery charge relay (if equipped). Adaptive cruise control. Run-start. 1 5A 4x4 module. Anti-lock brake system module. Run-start. 1 1 10A 1 10A Powertrain control module - ignition status power run. Run-start. Engine control module. Transmission control module. Blind spot information system. Run-start. Front camera. Rear camera. 35 — Not used. 36 — Blower motor relay. 37 — Trailer tow battery charge relay (only on non-trailer brake controller vehicles). 38 — A/C compressor clutch relay. 319 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating 39 — Horn relay. 40 — Supplemental air heater bank #2 relay. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 25A Protected Components 2 Glow plugs. 2 Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped). 2 Front blower motor. 40A 40A 3 50A Voltage quality. Body control module power. 3 Active front steering. 3 Supplemental air heater bank #2. 60A 50A 3 50A Cooling fan. Supplemental air heater bank #3. 3 Body control module run power 1 bus. 3 Inverter. 3 Body control module run power 2 bus. 3 Body control module B+ feed. 3 Anti-lock brake system pump. 3 Supplemental air heater bank #1. 3 Trailer brake control module. 3 Climate controlled seat module. 3 Auxiliary lighting module. 2 Power running boards. 50A 60A 50A 60A 60A 50A 30A 30A 40A 30A 2 30A Compressed natural gas fuel control module relay. 320 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Fuse Rating 2 30A — 2 20A 20A 20A 78 2 Trailer tow lighting module (if equipped). 2 Auxiliary power point #3 (center console). 2 Passenger power seat. 2 2 2 4x4 module. Auxiliary power point #5 (rear center console). Trailer tow left hand/right hand stop/turn (if equipped, not present with trailer brake controller). Not used. Not used. 2 30A — Fuel pump. Not used. 2 30A — Auxiliary power point #4 (USB charger, rear center console). Not used. 30A — 77 Auxiliary power point #2. — 74 76 2 2 20A Auxiliary power point #1 (instrument panel). Starter motor. 30A 20A Driver power seat. 2 30A — 75 2 30A 73 Anti-lock brake system valve. Not used. 30A 25A Protected Components Wiper motor. Not used. 321 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 79 80 81 82 83 84 Fuse Rating Protected Components 2 Power sliding rear window. 1 4x4 module. 1 4x4 solenoid. 1 Power telescoping mirrors. 1 Rear heated seats. 1 Trailer tow backup lamps (if equipped). 30A 25A 10A 10A 20A 10A 85 — Not used. 86 — Not used. 87 — 88 89 90 91 Not used. 1 10A — Multi contour seats. Not used. 1 Spot light module. 1 Upfitter interface module. 10A 10A 92 — Not used. 93 — Not used. 94 95 96 97 1 15A 1 10A 5A Transmission control module. Powertrain control module keep alive power. Rain sensor. 1 1 10A Run/Start control for Auxiliary power point #5 322 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 98 99 Fuse Rating 10A 30A Protected Components 1 Alternator sense. 1 Trailer tow parking lamps. 1 Micro fuse. case fuse. 3 J case fuse. 2M Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece. Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of the passenger footwell behind a trim panel. To remove the trim panel, pull it toward you and swing it away from the side. To reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves on the panel, and then push it shut. E145984 323 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating 1 — 2 3 4 Protected Components Not used. 1 Memory seat switch (lumbar power). 1 Driver door unlock relay. 7.5A 20A 5A Aftermarket electronic brake controller. Trailer brake controller Brake On/Off. Customer access circuits. 1 5 — Not used. 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 Driver window switch mirror fold. 2 Brake On/Off / Pressure Switch. 10A 10A — Not used. 5A Combined sense security module. 2 2 7.5A 2 7.5A Extended power restraints module. 2 Smart datalink connector power. 1 Tailgate release solenoid. 10A 15A Head-up display. 2 5A Instrument cluster. Smart data link. Steering column control module. 2 10A 5A Front climate control module. Push button ignition switch. Ignition switch. Key inhibit. 2 2 7.5A Transmission control switch (tow/haul). Select Shift switch. 324 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Fuse Rating 2 7.5A 5A 5A Upfitter switch. Run/Start. PTO relays. 2 1 10A 1 1 30A 1 30A Accessory delay. Power windows. Moonroof. Power folding mirrors relay. Inverter. Window/moonroof switch illumination. Central locking system relay. Left-hand front smart window motor. Door zone module. Right-hand front smart window motor. Door zone module. 1 Moonroof. 1 Sony amplifier - 10 channel. 30A 20A Active front steering module. Head-up display. Humidity sensor. 2 20A Protected Components 29 — Not used. 30 — Not used. 31 32 33 34 35 1 15A 1 10A 20A 1 SYNC. GPS module. Display. Radio frequency receiver. 1 Radio. 1 Run-start relay. 30A 5A Adjustable pedals switch. Extended power restraints module. 325 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 36 Fuse Rating 1 15A 37 Lane keeping system. Automatic high beam control. Auto-dimming mirrors. Rear heated seats. Camera module. 1 Heated steering wheel. 3 Rear power window switch. 20A 38 Protected Components 30A 1 Micro 2 fuse. 3 fuse. 3 Circuit breaker. 2 Micro CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. E217331 If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 326 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Fuses Fuse Types E207206 Callout Fuse Type A Micro 2 B Micro 3 C Maxi D Mini E M Case F J Case G J Case Low Profile 327 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine On GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Block the wheels. If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left hand side of the instrument panel. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. E166491 2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate the secondary release lever under the front of the hood near the center of your vehicle. Working with the Engine Off 1. Set the parking brake and shift to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. 328 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. 4. To close, lower the hood and make sure that it is closed properly and fully latched. E190266 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.2L A E222143 B J C I D H A. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 362). B. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 317). G 329 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing F E C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 346). D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 349). Maintenance E. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 350). F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 338). G. H. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 333). I. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333). J. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 353). Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 350). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.7L DIESEL F-Super Duty E234258 A. Air filter restriction gauge. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363). B. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 317). 330 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333). D. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 346). Maintenance E. Engine oil fill. See Engine Oil Check (page 333). L. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 353). F. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 349). M. G. Engine cooling system coolant reservoir (primary high-temperature cooling system). See Engine Coolant Check (page 342). Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 363). H. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 353). I. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 350). J. Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 350). K. Secondary cooling system coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 342). Scheduled Maintenance The recommended scheduled maintenance services are required because they are considered essential to the life and performance of your vehicle. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 584). Use only recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to Ford specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built for best performance in your vehicle. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 6.8L 331 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance A E222144 B J C D I A. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 362). B. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 317). C. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 346). D. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333). E. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 349). F. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 350). G. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 338). E H 332 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing G F H. Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 350). I. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 333). J. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 353). Maintenance 2. Run engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. 5. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 328). 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. For 6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview (page 329). For 6.8L Triton See Under Hood Overview (page 331). 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333). 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.2L/ 6.8L B A E161560 A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 6.7L DIESEL A B Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. E71362 A MIN B MAX Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.2L/6.8L WARNING To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 1. Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 333 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. ENGINE OIL CHECK - 6.7L DIESEL To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 2. Run engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. 5. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 328). 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 330). 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 333). 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). To top up the engine oil level do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. Remove the engine oil filler cap. For 6.2L V8 See Under Hood Overview (page 329). For 6.8L Triton See Under Hood Overview (page 331). Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). Recheck the oil level. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. 334 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. Engine lubrication for severe service operation Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). The following conditions define severe operation for which engine operation with SAE 5W-40 oil which meets Ford specification, WSS-M2C171-F1, is recommended. Oil and oil filter change intervals will be determined by the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted previously. Adding Engine Oil WARNING Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER To top up the engine oil level do the following: WARNINGS Do not handle a hot oil filter with bare hands. 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See Under Hood Overview (page 330). Turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Add engine oil of the proper viscosity and grade that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). You may have to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 4. Recheck the oil level. 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Continuous contact with used motor oil has caused cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your skin by washing with soap and water. If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ calculates the proper oil change service interval. When the information display indicates: OIL CHANGE REQUIRED, change the engine oil and oil filter. See Information Displays (page 113). The engine oil filter protects your engine by filtering harmful, abrasive or sludge particles and particles significantly smaller than most available will-fit filters. See Motorcraft Parts (page 422). 1. Unscrew the oil filter and oil pan drain plug and wait for the oil to drain. 2. Replace the filter. 3. Reinstall the oil pan drain plug. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. 335 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 4. Refill the engine with new oil. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). 5. For diesel engines, you need to reset the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™. See Information Displays (page 113). CHANGING THE CRANKCASE VENT FILTER ELEMENT (If Equipped) WARNING Do not dispose of engine oil or oil filters in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. Engine lubrication for severe service operation The following conditions define severe operation for which engine operation with SAE 5W-40 API CJ-4 is recommended. Oil and oil filter change intervals will be determined by the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ as noted previously. • • • • • • • • • • Do not clean or recondition the filter element. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft® parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. Use the correct specification filter element. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Frequent or extended idling (over 10 minutes per hour of normal driving). Low-speed operation/stationary use. If vehicle is operated in sustained ambient temperatures below -9°F (-23°C) or above 100°F (38°C). Frequent low-speed operation, consistent heavy traffic less than 25 mph (40 km/h). Operating in severe dust conditions. Operating the vehicle off road. Towing a trailer over 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Sustained, high-speed driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (maximum loaded weight for vehicle operation). Use of fuels with sulfur content other than ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD). Use of high-sulfur diesel fuel. Note: Operating your vehicle without a filter element or with an unapproved filter element may result in damage to the turbo charger or exchanger and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 336 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 1 5 6 4 A B 3 C E211404 7 2 8. Fully tighten all of the bolts to between 3–4 lb.ft (4.5–6 Nm) in the sequence shown. 9. Record the engine mileage and update the service log accordingly. E211403 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Filter cover. B Filter element. C Filter housing. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator. Clean the filter cover and remove the bolts. Carefully remove the filter cover. Remove used filter element from the filter housing and carefully dispose of it. Make sure that the sealing surfaces on the filter housing and cover are clean and free of debris. Install the new filter element. Install the filter cover. Install the bolts finger-tight. From the main menu scroll to: Message Action and description Settings Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Convenience Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Reset Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. 337 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Message When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Action and description Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. Reset Successful Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and the MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We recommend, Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240 (Rotunda tool part number: ROB75240). We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. Remaining Life {00}% If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. Not Reset Reset Cancelled Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use coolant or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK 6.2L/6.8L Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. WARNINGS Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is running or hot. Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. Adding Coolant WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is running or hot. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. 338 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance It is very important to use prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 427). Incorrect prediluted coolant use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Chemically clean the cooling system. We recommend Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush. 3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon as possible. Water alone, without prediluted coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. To top up the coolant level do the following: 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). 3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level. 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. Recycled Coolant We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available. Dispose of used engine coolant in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Do not mix different colors or types of prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of prediluted coolant or using an incorrect prediluted coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without prediluted coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. On arrival do the following: 339 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Severe Climates If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: • Engine power is limited. • The air conditioning system turns off. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It may be necessary to decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • A coolant concentration of 40% provides improved overheat protection. Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated WARNINGS Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. Fail-Safe Cooling Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. How Fail-Safe Cooling Works Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is running or hot. If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone: Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine may operate poorly. A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display. 340 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road. You can continue to drive your vehicle. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off. 2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on. If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following: Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped) 1. WARNING To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces. 2. If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach higher a temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures. 3. 4. 5. At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display. 341 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and shift the transmission into park (P). Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. After several minutes, if the temperature does not drop, follow the remaining steps. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue. Maintenance Adding Coolant ENGINE COOLANT CHECK 6.7L DIESEL WARNINGS Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNINGS Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is running or hot. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is running or hot. Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Do not use coolant or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. It is very important to use prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and models may not be approved to Ford specifications and may cause damage to the cooling system. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 342 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add prediluted coolant to the maximum level. For all vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator, follow these steps to add engine coolant: If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. 1. Turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. 3. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with prediluted engine coolant to within the minimum and maximum range on the engine coolant reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and the radiator is almost full. If coolant is added to bring the level within the minimum and maximum range when the engine is not cold, the system may remain under filled. 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level. Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved antifreeze concentrate diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Using water that has not been deionized may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion or plugging of the small cooling system passageways. Note: In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. Water alone, without coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. When you reach a service location, you must have the cooling system drained, flushed and refilled using the correct specification prediluted coolant or antifreeze concentrate. See Capacities and Specifications (page 432). Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. Do not add extra inhibitors or non-specified additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. 343 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Engine and Secondary Cooling System Refill Procedure 11. The following procedure should be used when refilling the engine or secondary cooling systems after it has been drained or become extremely low: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release. Step back while the pressure releases. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. Slowly add prediluted engine coolant to the coolant reservoir until the coolant level is within the minimum and maximum range as listed on the reservoir. Reinstall the pressure relief cap. Start and run the engine at 2000 rpm for 2 minutes. Shut engine off, and remove the pressure relief cap as previously outlined. If required, add prediluted engine coolant to the coolant reservoir until the coolant level is within the minimum and maximum range as listed on the reservoir. Engine cooling system: Repeat Step 5 until the coolant level has stabilized (is no longer dropping after each step) and the upper radiator hose at the radiator is warm to the touch (indicating that the engine thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the radiator). 12. 13. 14. Check the secondary cooling system. Repeat Step 5 until the coolant level has stabilized (is no longer dropping after each step) and the lower passenger side of the secondary radiator is warm to the touch (indicating secondary thermostat is open and coolant is flowing through the entire system). Reinstall the pressure relief cap. Shut the engine off and let it cool. Check the coolant level in the reservoir before you drive your vehicle the next few times. If necessary, add prediluted engine coolant to the coolant reservoir until the coolant level is within the minimum and maximum range as listed on the reservoir. After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration. Recycled Coolant We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available. Dispose of used engine coolant in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. 344 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance If you drive in extremely hot climates: • You can decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. • • Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. Checking Coolant Corrosion Inhibitor Additive Strength At specific mileage intervals as listed in the scheduled maintenance information chapter, the coolant corrosion inhibitor additive should be checked. An information message may display in the optional information display at this time. The purpose of checking is to verify the correct engine coolant concentration (freeze point protection) and corrosion inhibitor additive level (strength) of the coolant for maximum engine performance and protection. Three products are available to confirm the life and health of the coolant, one tool, a test kit and a coolant inhibitor additive: • Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer 75240 – Recommended refractometer to test coolant concentration. (Rotunda tool part number: ROB75240). Rotunda 328-R071–ELC (Antifreeze Coolant ELC Contamination Kit) – Evaluates the corrosion inhibitor additive strength. Note the first step is to verify the vehicle’s coolant concentration is in the correct range of 40 – 60%. Coolant concentrations outside this range will not provide valid test results. If the report results in a pass, for example the cooling system does not show excessive contamination, the corrosion inhibitor additive strength is sufficient, and no action is required. If the report results as insufficient (does not pass), the corrosion inhibitor additive strength of the coolant is too low. If the engine cooling system corrosion inhibitor additive strength is low, add 47 fl oz (1.4 L) of Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer. If the secondary cooling system corrosion inhibitor additive strength is low, add 16 fl oz (0.47 L) of Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer. Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer – Additive to boost the corrosion inhibitor level based upon the test results of the Antifreeze Coolant ELC Contamination Kit. The Revitalizer may be added two times over the life of the coolant. If additional dosages are required, the cooling system must be flushed and refilled per the instructions in the Workshop Manual. Make sure to follow the proper coolant and additive specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). 345 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Coolant Change Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the scheduled maintenance information, the coolant should be changed. The information display may display a message to change coolant at this time. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid For scheduled intervals of the fluid checks and changes, See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan Clutch) Your vehicle may have an engine driven cooling fan drive (also called a fan clutch). This fan drive changes the fan speed to match the vehicle’s changing cooling air flow requirements. Fan speed, fan noise level and fuel consumption all will increase based on the driving conditions that include trailer towing, hill climbing, heavy loads, high speed and high ambient temperature, individually or in combination. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 19 mi (30 km)). Verify that the transmission fluid temperature gauge, located on the instrument cluster, is within normal range. The fan drive is designed to provide the minimum fan speed (and resulting minimum fan noise and fuel consumption) required to meet the ever changing vehicle cooling air flow requirements. You will hear the amount of fan noise increasing and decreasing as the engine power requirements and vehicle driving conditions change as you drive. This is to be expected as being normal to the operation of your vehicle. High levels of fan noise might also be heard when your engine is first started, and should normally decrease after driving for a short time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). 346 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Drive the vehicle 19 mi (30 km)until it reaches normal operating temperature. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. With the engine running, parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. Latch the gearshift lever in P and leave the engine running. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to the Under Hood Overview in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. Maintenance 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low Fluid Level Type A E163741 Type B E163739 Type B E163742 For vehicles equipped with 5-speed transmissions, check the fluid at the normal operating temperature of 151°F (66°C) to 170°F (77°C) on a level surface. For vehicles equipped with 6-speed transmissions, check the fluid at the normal operating temperature of 196°F (91°C) to 215°F (102°C) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 19 mi (30 km). E163740 Do not drive the vehicle if there is no indication of fluid on the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C). High Fluid Level Type A Correct Fluid Level Type A 347 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance • • the dipstick handle. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). If necessary, add fluid in 8 fl oz (250 ml) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. Type A E163743 Type B E163745 Type B E163744 Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and engagement concerns, and possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. E163746 Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid Levels If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician. Note: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. Note: An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and engagement concerns, and possible damage. Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on: 348 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. BRAKE FLUID CHECK WARNINGS Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK (If Equipped) Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately. E164246 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). 349 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 5. Switch the engine off. 6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is between the MIN and MAX range. 7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range. For proper fluid type, See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING E170684 If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid. Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Check the power steering fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON LV ATF State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature. 1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range. 2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to between the MIN and MAX range. 3. Switch the engine on. 350 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance You should drain water from the module assembly whenever the warning light illuminates or a message appears in the information display advising you to drain the water separator. This occurs when approximately 6.76 fl oz (200 ml) of water accumulates in the module. If you allow the water level to exceed this level, the water may pass through to the engine and may cause fuel injection equipment damage. DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER WATER TRAP - 6.7L DIESEL WARNING Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. Your vehicle has a diesel fuel conditioner module. The module is mounted between the outboard side of the fuel tank and the frame rail. Filter Location Use the tables below to find the location of your filter. Note: The module is at the front of the fuel tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank on some models. Pick-up Truck Cab Type Box Length Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m) SuperCab. Super Crew Cab. 6.75 ft (2.057 m) 8 ft (2.4 m) 6.75 ft (2.057 m) Filter Location Left side of fuel tank. In front of fuel tank. 8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank. Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank. Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks Right side of midship fuel tank. Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank. Chassis Cab 2. Access the underside of your vehicle. Draining the Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module 1. Switch the engine off. 351 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 3 2 E226475 E226212 3. The diesel fuel conditioner module is on the left-hand frame rail. 4. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner module. Turn the drain plug counterclockwise until it stops. Do not use any tools to loosen the drain plug. Drain the filter, approximately 0.5 gal (2 L), into an appropriate container. Do not re-use the fuel drained from the module. 5. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise until it stops and you feel a strong resistance. Do not use any tools to tighten the drain plug. FUEL FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. 352 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNINGS Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. When a battery replacement is required, you must use a recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery, make sure you reinstall the battery cover or shield. Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability. This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. This vehicle may have more than one battery. Removing the battery cables from only one battery does not disconnect your vehicle electrical system. Make sure you disconnect the battery cables from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage. To restore the settings, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 353 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Apply the parking brake. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Switch off all accessories. Press the brake pedal and start your vehicle. Maintenance Systems included are: • Heated rear window. • Heated seats. • Climate control. • Heated steering wheel. • Audio unit. • Navigation system. 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 98). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 445). 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to completely relearn the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. A message may appear in the information displays to alert you that battery protection actions are active. These messages are only for notification that an action is taking place, and not intended to indicate an electrical problem or that the battery requires replacement. After battery replacement, or in some cases after charging the battery with an external charger, the battery management system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to relearn the battery state of charge. During this time your vehicle must remain fully locked with the ignition switched off. Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned. Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of charge, the battery management system may temporarily disable some electrical systems. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. Electrical Accessory Installation If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. To make sure the battery management system works correctly, do not connect an electrical device ground connection directly to the battery negative post. This can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. Battery Management System (If Equipped) Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect battery performance and durability. This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. The battery management system monitors battery conditions and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is detected, the system temporarily disables some electrical systems to protect the battery. 354 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES A E165794 E142463 2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm. 3. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back on the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when you turn the ignition on. Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES • You can manually move the wiper arms when the ignition is off. This allows for ease of blade replacement and cleaning under the blades. • Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance. You can improve poor wiper quality by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer. E165804 1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass. 355 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Headlamp Aiming Target E142465 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line, the headlamp will need to be adjusted. E142592 A 8 feet (2.4 meters) B Center height of lamp to ground C 25 feet (7.6 meters) D Horizontal reference line B Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure A 1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away. 2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height. Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. E223774 3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. Note: A. LED headlamp. B. Halogen headlamp. 356 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the other headlamp. 7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable. CHANGING A BULB WARNINGS Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. E224990 Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them. 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 360). Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. Front Park and Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs Headlamp Bulbs Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs, remove the air intake pipe. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 362). Note: To access the right-hand side bulbs, remove the air intake pipe. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 362). To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with diesel engine only. To access the left-hand side bulbs, remove the washer reservoir filler tube. Vehicles with diesel engine only. 357 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. To access the bulb, reach behind the bumper. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Note: Handle a halogen bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lamps are operated. E224991 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp Bulbs Pickup Models - Vehicles without Blind Spot Information System Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. 5 Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped) E223775 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies. E163826 358 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 3. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp assembly and carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs. 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. Chassis Cabs Pickup Models - Vehicles with Blind Spot Information System E163828 4 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Remove the screws and the lamp lens from lamp assembly. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. Cargo Lamp and Central High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs 1. E224204 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5 Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Remove the screws and carefully pull the lamp assembly from the vehicle to expose the bulb sockets. 6 Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies. Remove the bolts from the tail lamp assembly and carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs. Remove the screws from the blind spot information system module cover. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. E187290 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 359 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 2. To access the bulb, reach behind the bumper. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. License Plate Lamp Bulb BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. E163830 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. Exterior Lamps Lamp Specification Power (Watt) H13/9008 60/55 Front side marker lamps. W5W 5 Front fog lamps. 9140 40 T20/7444NA 28/8 Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker lamps. Low series.* 3157 27/7 Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker lamps. High series.* LED LED Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator and rear side marker lamps.** 3157 27/7 Reversing lamps.* W21W 21 Reversing lamps.** 3157 27/7 Headlamps. Front direction indicator and parking lamps. 360 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Lamp * Specification Power (Watt) License plate lamp. Low series. 168 5 License plate lamp. High series. LED LED Central high mounted brake lamp. 912 12.8 Central high mounted cargo lamp. 912 12.8 Side direction indicator and mirror clearance lamp. LED LED Front clearance lamp. LED LED Rear clearance lamp. LED LED Front identification lamp. LED LED Rear identification lamp. LED LED Underhood lamp. LED LED Pickup only. ** Chassis cab only. Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. Interior Lamps Lamp Specification Power (Watt) Map lamp. LED LED Glove compartment lamp. LED LED Interior lamp. LED LED Overhead console lamp. LED LED Luggage compartment lamp. LED LED Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. 361 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER - 6.2L/6.8L x4 WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 2 3 Use the correct specification air filter element. See Motorcraft Parts (page 422). Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 4 1 Change the air filter element at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). E226426 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. (6.8L only) 2. Remove the air intake tube securing clamp. 3. Pull the air intake tube away from the air filter housing. 4. Remove the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter housing cover. 362 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance x4 5 4 3 2 E226427 5. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 6. Install in the reverse order. CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER - 6.7L DIESEL 1 WARNING E226429 To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the air intake tube securing clamp. 3. Pull the air intake tube away from the air filter housing. 4. Remove the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. Remove the air filter housing cover. Use the correct specification air filter element. See Motorcraft Parts (page 422). Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Change the air filter element at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). 363 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Air Filter Restriction Gauge 5 6 E226430 5. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 6. Remove the foam filter from the air filter housing. 7. Install in the reverse order. E226428 The air filter restriction gauge is in the upper housing of the air filter assembly. Check the air filter restriction gauge whenever you open the hood to carry out general engine maintenance or at least every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions, check the gauge at least every 500 mi (800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs first. Change the air filter element when the restriction gauge reads near the change filter line and the gauge is yellow. Allowing the restriction gauge to reach maximum affects engine performance and fuel economy. 364 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall or extreme rain conditions may allow excessive amounts of snow or water into the air intake system. This could restrict air flow and cause the engine to lose power or shut down. Your vehicle has two fuel filters. The first filter mounts on top of the engine on the left-hand side. The second filter is inside the diesel fuel conditioner module. The module is attached to the fuel tank in different locations depending on the configuration of your truck. See table below for configurations. After installing a new air filter element, you must reset the gauge by pressing the reset button. Note: The module is at the front of the fuel tank or at the front of the aft-axle fuel tank on some models. After operating your vehicle during heavy snowfall or extreme rain, do the following: • Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and clear any snow and ice from the air filter housing inlet and reset the air filter restriction gauge. • Extreme rain: The air filter element dries out after approximately 15–30 minutes of driving at highway speeds. At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and reset the air filter restriction gauge. Regular fuel filter changes are an important part of engine maintenance; failing to keep with the scheduled maintenance could lead to engine performance issues and fuel injection system damage. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). Use only recommended service parts conforming to specifications. See Motorcraft Parts (page 422). Note: Using fuel that has high levels of impurities may require more frequent filter replacements than the service interval specifies. Note: Do not remove the foam filter. CHANGING THE ENGINEMOUNTED AND DIESEL FUEL CONDITIONER MODULE FUEL FILTERS - 6.7L DIESEL Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Filter Filter Location WARNING Use the tables below to find the location of your filter. Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. 365 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Pick-up Truck Cab Type Box Length Regular. 8 ft (2.4 m) SuperCab. Super Crew Cab. 6.75 ft (2.057 m) 8 ft (2.4 m) 6.75 ft (2.057 m) Filter Location Left side of fuel tank. In front of fuel tank. 8 ft (2.4 m) Left side of fuel tank. Cab Type Fuel Tank Type Filter Location Chassis Cab. Single midship fuel tank Right side of fuel tank. Chassis Cab. Aft axle/midship fuel tanks Right side of midship fuel tank. Chassis Cab. Single aft axle fuel tank Front of fuel tank. Chassis Cab 2. Locate your filter. Removal E247666 1. For 2017 models, disconnect the fuel line quick connect coupling from the in tank fuel pump. For 2018 models and later, skip this step but insure that the fuel filler cap is closed before draining the filter. If the cap isn't closed, the filter will siphon the fuel tank even with the anti-siphon valve. 366 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance 6 3 4 E226213 5 4. Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. Fully loosen the bolts securing the lower portion of the diesel fuel conditioner module housing. Note: Do not fully remove the bolts from the lower portion of the diesel fuel conditioner module housing. E226212 3. Drain the diesel fuel conditioner module. Turn the drain plug counterclockwise until it stops. Do not use any tools to loosen the drain plug. Drain the filter, approximately 0.53 gal (2 L), into an appropriate container. Do not re-use the fuel drained from the module. 6. Remove the lower portion of the diesel fuel conditioner module housing. 367 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance The engine-mounted fuel filter is a plastic disposable cartridge. 7 Removal 1 E226563 7. E226215 Slide the filter element toward the drain plug to disengage the securing clips. 1. Installation Disconnect the fuel lines by squeezing the connector tabs and pulling the lines straight off. 3 1. Slide the filter element into the housing and fully engage the securing clips. 2. Install the lower portion of the housing. Tighten the bolts until you feel a strong resistance. Maximum torque 7 lb.ft (9 Nm). 3. Connect the electrical connector. 4. Tighten the drain plug, turn it clockwise until it stops and you feel a strong resistance. Do not use any tools to tighten the drain plug. 2 Engine-mounted Fuel Filter E226214 Although the fuel system is not fully pressurized when the vehicle is off, some residual pressure may remain in the fuel system since it can take some time for the pressure to completely bleed off. Therefore, we recommend you place an absorbent cloth below the filter connectors to absorb any fuel that may drain. 2. Rotate the filter fully counterclockwise until the peg is at the far end of the slot. 3. Pull the filter straight up from the bracket and discard the filter. 368 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Maintenance Installation 1. Install the new filter into the filter bracket. Turn the filter clockwise to lock it in place. 2. Reconnect the fuel lines. 369 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS Your dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. Materials For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Name Specification Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada) WSS-M99P43-B Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada) • CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. • 370 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to the touch, or during strong or direct sunlight. Vehicle Care • • • Exterior Plastic Parts Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: • Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. • • • Cleaning the Headlamps Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody • Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle using water. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. • • Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Under Hood For removing black rubber marks from under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. WAXING Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. 371 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. • • • • • • • Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. • • • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. CLEANING THE EXHAUST 6.7L DIESEL WARNINGS Failure to maintain the functional holes, in the tailpipe section of the exhaust, clean and free of debris or foreign material may result in the holes becoming blocked or plugged. Do not modify or remove the tail-pipe section. Blocked or plugged holes or removal/modification of the system could result in elevated exhaust gas temperatures which may result in vehicle/property damage or personal injury. CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the diesel oxidation catalytic converter and/or the diesel particulate filter (DPF). The diesel When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. 372 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. WARNINGS oxidation catalytic converter and/or the DPF heats up to a high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and can stay hot even after the engine is turned off. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. E163380 The visible holes in the exhaust tip and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right rear tire(s) are functional. The holes need to be kept clear of mud/debris or foreign material to maintain proper function of the exhaust system. Clean and remove debris or foreign material if present as needed. Spraying with a hose during regular washing of vehicle should help keep holes clean and clear of debris or foreign material. CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNINGS Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash. CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. 373 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. Note: Microfiber cloth fabric is made of polyester microfiber with micro-porous polyurethane. Using commercially available fabric cleaners can cause permanent damage. Note: Do not use commercially available leather and vinyl cleaning products on microfiber cloth fabric. Note: Your vehicle may have microfiber cloth fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and door panels. Depending on the type of stain, use water, lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when cleaning. For cleaning microfiber cloth, refer to the following chart: Type of Stain Cleaning Procedure Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup. Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Blood, egg, excrement or urine. Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm water because it makes these substances coagulate. Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, and tea. treat with lemon juice and then rinse. Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice cream or mustard. Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar. Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Dye transfer and all other stains. Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water. 374 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care 1. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS 2. WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. 3. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 375). 4. Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas. 5. • 6. • • • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If Equipped) Without King Ranch Edition Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. For cleaning and removing spots and stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces: Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. 375 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care You should: • • • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. • Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • • • • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. Household cleaners. Alcohol solutions. Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. Scratches Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides, there may be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and are considered to be proof of a genuine leather product. With King Ranch Edition In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section. Your vehicle has seating covered in premium, top-grain leather that is extremely durable, but still requires special care and maintenance in order to preserve longevity and comfort. Conditioning Regular cleaning and conditioning maintains the appearance of the leather. Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or call 1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United States. If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium leather conditioner. Cleaning For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution. • • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather. Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics. • Clean spills as quickly as possible. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather. • • 376 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section. Make sure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of conditioner to a clean, dry cloth. Rub the conditioner into the leather until it disappears. Allow the conditioner to dry, then repeat the process for the entire interior. If a film appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean cloth. Vehicle Care Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. CLEANING THE WHEELS (If Equipped) General 1. Regularly clean them with a wheel cleaner. We recommend that you use Ford approved wheel cleaner if available. 2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a sponge. 3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and tar remover. We recommend that you use Ford approved bug and tar remover if available. 4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water after cleaning. • If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. • • • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. Body • • • Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers. • 377 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Vehicle Care • • Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected. Brakes Engine • • • • • Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. Tires • • • When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Battery • • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Removing Vehicle From Storage Cooling system • • Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous Fuel system • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. 378 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Vehicle Care • • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. 379 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners GENERAL INFORMATION Use only approved wheel and tire sizes, using other sizes could damage your vehicle. If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the system reprogrammed. If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted by the manufacturer, you can check the suitability with an authorized dealer. WARNINGS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additional information related to the functionality and maintenance of your tires can be found later in this chapter. See Tire Care (page 382). In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressures can be found on the Tire Label, which is located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. This information can also be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door last post; next to the driver’s seating position). Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. Ford strongly recommends maintaining these tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced fuel economy, and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold. Note: Check your tire pressures at least once per month. Set the pressure for your spare tire to the highest value given for your vehicle and tire size combination (if equipped). E145298 380 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel drive when the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal and are not cause for concern. Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire relative to the remaining tires can have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there is a significant difference between the size of a spare and the remaining tires, four-wheel drive functionality may be limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 214). Study your owner's manual and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped) Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive, when selected, has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different modes as necessary. For information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel Drive (page 214). For information on transfer case maintenance, See Maintenance (page 328). You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. E145299 381 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires • • • Higher - to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Shorter - to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase. Narrower - to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use. As a result of the above dimensional differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks often have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition. These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. E168583 382 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Traction AA A B C WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 ½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 383 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Glossary of Tire Terminology *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. 384 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Information on P Type Tires C D B E F G H A I J M L K E142543 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example). A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. 385 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Letter rating mph ( km/h) M 81 (130) N 87 (140) Q 99 (159) R 106 (171) S 112 (180) T 118 (190) U 124 (200) H 130 (210) V 149 (240) W 168 (270) Y 186 (299) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number: This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and 386 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: *Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge 387 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C A Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. D E142544 B LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below. 388 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires B A C C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. D E Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 389 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Tire Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you do not maintain the inflation pressure at the levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may experience a condition known as shimmy. Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels over a bump or dip in the road that does not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result from significant under-inflation of the tires, improper tires (load range, size, or type), or vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, you should slowly reduce speed by either lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease as the vehicle speed decreases. Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. WARNING Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or 390 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. To check the pressure in your tire(s): 1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile. Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (for example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. 3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure. Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. 4. Replace the valve cap. 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. 391 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T type mini-spare tires, (see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges. All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped): This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained, supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations. For example, during any procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area. WARNING Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Tire Inflation Information WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and property. 392 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires E161437 it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case 393 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Tire Wear Age WARNINGS Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear or even if they have not been used. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high-load conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require you to replace tires more frequently. You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters). When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed 394 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number WARNINGS Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. 395 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. WARNINGS When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: 1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. 2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. 3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. 4. Use both eye and ear protection. For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Replacing a Tire That is Greenhouse Gas Certified The tires installed on this vehicle at the factory as original equipment are certified for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Efficiency regulations. Replacement tires must be of equal or lower rolling resistance level (TRRL or Crr). Consult with your tire supplier(s) for appropriate replacement tires. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. 396 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Safety Practices If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. WARNINGS If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. *Observe posted speed limits. *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns. *Avoid potholes and objects on the road. *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking. Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. 397 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Tire Rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Sometime irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. WARNING If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system, then you need to update the settings for the system sensors. Always perform the system reset procedure after tire rotation. If you do not reset the system, it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary. Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. E142548 Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at left of diagram). 398 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires E166988 Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six tire rotation (front tires at top of diagram). If your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that the front and rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only side to side. We do not recommend splitting up the dual rear wheels. Rotate them side to side as a set. After tire rotation, inflation pressures must be adjusted for the tires new positions in accordance with vehicle requirements. E227387 Note: When installing 17-inch dual rear wheels, align the valve stems facing each other. 399 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires • USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip aluminum wheels. Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: • • If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles with 20 inch wheels and tires. • • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle Use only SAE Class S chains. Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 400 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. E142549 Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. 401 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, one or more of your tires are under-inflated and needs to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Single Rear Wheel When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. E224333 Dual Rear Wheel To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: E224332 402 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure warning light Possible cause Customer action required Solid warning light Tire under inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Flashing warning light Tire rotation without sensor training On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system must be retrained following every tire rotation. See Tire Care (page 382). Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 403 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires When Inflating Your Tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires. WARNING To determine the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure. How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure Note: You need to perform the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure after each tire rotation. The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. To provide the vehicle's load carrying capability, some vehicles require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires. Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. System reset tips: 404 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires • • • To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, perform the system reset procedure at least three feet (one meter) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the system reset procedure at the same time. Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels. A double horn will sound indicating the need to repeat the procedure. 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order: Left front (driver's side front tire), Right front (passenger's side front tire), Right rear (passenger's side rear tire), Left rear (driver's side rear tire). 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it. Performing the System Reset Procedure (Single Rear Wheel) Read the entire procedure before attempting. 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained (driver's side rear tire), the system indicator stops flashing, and a message is shown in the information display. 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful and you must repeat it. If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump. 2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition. 3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off. 4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. You must accomplish this within 10 seconds. If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound once, the system indicator will flash and a message is shown in the information display. If this does not occur, please try again starting at Step 2. If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message is shown in the information display, seek service from your authorized dealer. 1. 405 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires 11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position) or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following order: Left front (driver's side front tire), Right front (passenger's side front tire), Right outer rear (passenger's side rear outer tire), Right inner rear (passenger's side rear inner tire), Left outer rear (driver's side rear outer tire), Left inner rear (driver's side rear inner tire). 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it. Performing the System Reset Procedure (Dual Rear Wheel) For further information see Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and refer to Dual Rear Wheel, earlier in this section. Read the entire procedure before attempting. 1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all six tires and have access to an air pump. 7. 2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition. 3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off. 4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. You must accomplish this within 10 seconds. If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound once, the system indicator will flash and a message is shown in the information display. If this does not occur, please try again starting at Step 2. If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message is shown in the information display, seek service from your authorized dealer. 8. 9. 10. 11. 406 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right outer rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right inner rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left outer rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left inner rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained, the system indicator stops flashing, and a message is shown in the information display. Wheels and Tires 12. 13. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful and you must repeat it. If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer. Set all six tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position) or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is an added safety feature that allows you to view your trailer tire pressures through the information display. See General Information (page 113). Tire pressure sensors are mounted into each tire on your trailer. The sensors send a message to your vehicle indicating the current trailer tire pressure. If the trailer tire pressure monitoring system detects that a tire is low, a warning message appears in the information display. The trailer tire pressure status screen in the information display highlights the tire with a low pressure. The main function of the trailer tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your trailer tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See Information Messages (page 129). Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (If Equipped) Note: Additional equipment may be required for your vehicle to support trailer tire pressure monitoring. See your authorized dealer for more information. When a Temporary Spare or New Tire is Installed Note: The trailer tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance. It is your responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures at all times. If you have replaced a trailer tire with a new or spare tire, a warning message appears and pressure readings are no longer displayed for that tire. Note: If a trailer tire is repaired, replaced or broken down for service, the screw and valve on the trailer tire pressure sensor should be replaced. See your authorized dealer for details. To restore the full function of the trailer tire pressure monitoring system: • Have the damaged wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted to your trailer. • Install the trailer tire pressure monitoring sensor into the new wheel and tire assembly. • Perform the trailer tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure. Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure Note: You need to perform the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure after each tire rotation, or when a new trailer tire pressure sensor is installed into a trailer tire. E235807 407 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information The trailer tire pressure monitoring system can be reset through the menu in the information display. See General Information (page 113). Performing the trailer setup process also resets the trailer tire pressure monitoring system. WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired. WARNING If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system, the indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they may cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor. Full-size dissimilar spare When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time. • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. If you get a flat tire when driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system, have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 400). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the system sensor for damage. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is recommended that you do not: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD. • Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is stationary. • Use 4WD on dry pavement. 408 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • Four-wheel drive capability. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to: • Towing a trailer. • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack. Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible. Location of the Spare Tire and Tools If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire, jack and associated tools, see the following table for their locations: Tool Location Spare tire - pick-up trucks only Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper. Jack Fastened to the floor pan behind the rearmost seat on the passenger side. Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten- Regular Cab: Fastened to floor behind the sion - only available on dual rear wheel driver seat. vehicles and wheel chock - only available Super Cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to the on single rear wheel vehicles equipped with floor under the rear seat on the driver's side. a diesel engine. Removing the Spare Tire (With Spare Tire Carrier Only) The following tools are required to remove the spare tire: E162795 409 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires One handle extension and two typical extensions. To assemble, align the button with the hole and slide the parts together. 1. Use the ignition key to open the lock at the rear bumper. 2. Fully insert the jack handle, with one extension, through the bumper hole and into the guide tube. You feel some resistance when you turn the jack handle assembly. 3. Turn the handle counterclockwise and lower the spare tire until you can slide the tire rearward and the cable is slack. 4. Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel. To disconnect, press the button and pull apart. E162796 One wheel nut wrench. Slide over the square end of the jack handle. E162800 5. If not replacing the spare or flat tire to the underbody storage area, raise the wheel retainer up into the installed position. Tire Change Procedure E162797 WARNINGS When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P). E227181 410 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires WARNINGS To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park (P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel. Do not get under a vehicle that is only supported by a vehicle jack. E142551 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 1. Turn the engine off and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite of the flat tire using the wheel chock. Note: Lock the manual hub on the wheel if the vehicle is a 4x4. Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer. 2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug wrench and spare tire from the stowage locations. 3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim. 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut ½ turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. Note: For vehicles with dual rear wheels, insert the lug wrench extension into the lug wrench to reach the lug nuts. Only use the spare wheel carrier to stow the wheel provided with your vehicle. Other wheel sizes could cause the spare wheel carrier to fail if it does not fit securely or is too heavy. Note: Do not use impact tools or power tools operating at over 200 RPM on the spare wheel carrier winch, which may cause it to malfunction and prevent a secure fit. Override the winch at least three times (there is an audible click each time) to make sure the wheel and tire fit securely. Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers. 411 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel Vehicles E162803 Front driver side (4x4) E162801 Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat area on the outboard side of the differential. 1. Insert the hooked end of the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle. 2. Position the jack according to the following guides: E162804 Front passenger side (4x4) Note: View shown from the rear of the vehicle to clearly identify the jack point. Place the jack directly under the axle. E162802 Front (4x2) E162805 412 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires 7. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving. 8. Unblock the wheels. 1 Rear Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle. Jacking the Vehicle 6 7 4 3 5 8 E161441 E162811 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2 8-lug nut torque sequence Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground and high enough to install the spare tire. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles. If you are replacing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles, the valve stem must be facing outward. If you are replacing the outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 418). Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire carrier. 10 1 3 8 5 6 7 E169375 4 2 9 10-lug nut torque sequence E162820 413 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires When installing the wheel center ornaments, make sure that the ornament retention towers on the back side of the ornament are aligned with the studs or lug nuts. The retention towers are designed to be installed over the studs or nuts and retain to the flange on the lug nut. 1. Slide the notched end of the jack handle over the release valve and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle. Make sure the valve is closed by turning it clockwise. 2. Position the jack according to the following guides: E162821 E162813 If the ornament retention towers are aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the ornament is improperly installed. This improper installation may appear and sound correct, but does not keep the ornament on the vehicle. Ornaments improperly installed in this manner, fall off or become loose with minimal force or impact. Front (4x2): F-350 dual rear wheel Note: Place the jack directly under the I-beam. F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and F-550 Vehicles E162814 Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear wheel Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat area on the outboard side of the differential housing. E162812 414 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires E162815 E162817 Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual rear wheel Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel Note: View shown from the rear of the vehicle to clearly identify the jack point. Note: Place the jack directly under the axle and inboard of the radius arm so that the jack clears the radius arm. E162818 Rear: F-450 and F-550 Jacking the Vehicle E162816 Front: F-450 and F-550 E162819 1. 415 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Insert the jack handle into the pump linkage. Wheels and Tires 2. Use an up-and-down motion with the jack handle to raise the wheel completely off the ground. Note: Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a pressure release valve that prevents lifting loads which exceed the jack's rated capacity. 1 6 7 4 3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels. If you are replacing the outboard wheel, the valve stem must be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 5. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve counterclockwise. Opening the release valve slowly provides a more controlled rate of descent. 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 418). 7. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire carrier. 8. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving. 9. Unblock the wheels. 3 5 8 E161441 2 8-lug nut torque sequence 10 1 3 8 5 6 7 E169375 4 2 9 10-lug nut torque sequence Installing Dual Rear Wheel Ornaments A B E162822 1. 416 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Align the ornament with the lug nuts. A is the clip and B is the flange. Wheels and Tires E162823 E162825 2. Hold the ornament so that all of the retention clips are sitting on the flange of the lug nuts. A C D B E162826 Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire E162824 Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire. 3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to tap the ornament in a star pattern. There should be an even gap between the ornament and the wheel. 4. Be sure to install all the clips on the nuts over the flanges so that there is an even gap all around and the retention clips are fully seated. 1. Place the tire on end with the valve stem facing toward the front of the vehicle. E162800 417 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires 2. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 3. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable. 4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare tire carrier does not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience. 5. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it does not move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire. 6. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure, every six months, per scheduled maintenance information, or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control. 418 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Wheels and Tires Bolt size lb.ft (Nm) M14 x 1.5 165 lb.ft (224 Nm) * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at 500 miles (800 kilometers) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures. On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads. E161443 E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 419 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L Engine 6.2L V8 Engine Cubic inches 378 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.041-0.047 in (1.04-1.20 mm) Compression ratio 9.8:1 Drivebelt Routing E163761 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL Engine 6.7L Diesel Cubic inches 406 Required fuel Low Sulfur Diesel up to B20 Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 Compression ratio 16.2:1 420 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing Dual Alternator Single Alternator E224820 E224819 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L Engine 6.8L V10 Engine Cubic inches 413 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.039 - 0.043 in (1.00 - 1.10 mm) Compression ratio 9.2:1 421 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing 6.8L Engines without A/C 6.8L Engines with A/C E163763 E163762 MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.2L Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element FA-1928 Oil filter FL-820-S Battery (XL) BXT-65-650 Battery (all except XL) BXT-65-750 Spark plugs-platinum SP-526 Windshield wiper blade WW-2247 Transmission fluid filter FT-187 Cabin air filter FP-79 For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 581). 422 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.7L DIESEL Component Motorcraft Part number Engine oil filter FL-2051S Foam pre-filter FA-1927 Air filter FA-1926 Fuel filter FG-1147 Battery (Two) BXT-65-750 Windshield wiper blade WW-2247 Cabin air filter FP-79 Transmission filter FT-187 For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. 423 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 6.8L Component Motorcraft Part number Air filter element. FA-1928 Oil filter. FL-820-S Battery (XL). BXT-65-650 Battery (all except XL). BXT-65-750 Spark plugs-platinum. SP-509 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Transmission fluid filter FT-187 Cabin air filter. FP-79 For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36/USC-D. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Normal Scheduled Maintenance (page 584). 424 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E142477 E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: 425 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167469 E167814 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Description Code Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140 P Six-speed automatic transmission 6R100 S Six-speed automatic transmission 6R140W W 426 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 7.0 qt (6.6 L) Engine coolant 21.3 qt (20.2 L) Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle 2.7 qt (2.6 L) Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker) 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L) Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker) 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L) Rear axle-Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L) * Automatic transmission fluid (6R100) 16.7 qt (15.8 L) ** Automatic transmission fluid (6R140) 17.4 qt (16.5 L) ** Transfer case fluid 1.9 qt (1.8 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle location) 26.5 gal (100.3 L) Fuel tank (All except 176 inch wheelbase and incomplete vehicles) 34.5 gal (130.6 L) Fuel tank (176 inch wheelbase) 48.5 gal (183.6 L) Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location) 40 gal (151.4 L) 427 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C refrigerant 27 oz (0.77 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil 4.1 fl oz (120 ml) *For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L). **Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFS WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFS12 WSS-M2C946-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Front axle fluid : WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant 428 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 except 3.73 ratio Chassis WSP-M2C197-A Cab) (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Friction Modifier Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 EST-M2C118-A Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) : WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Transfer case fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Transfer case fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Power steering fluid: Motorcraft® MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Spindle bearing: High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease XG-11 WSS-M2C192-A Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A 429 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake pedal shift: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E WSD-M1C227-A We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. 430 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. E142732 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below. Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C953-A1 XO-0W30-QSP 431 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications E240523 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.7L DIESEL Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (includes filter change) 13.0 qt (12.3 L) Engine coolant (primary high-temperature cooling system loop) 35.1 qt (33.2 L) 1 Engine coolant additive (primary hightemperature cooling system loop) 47.3 fl oz (1.4 L) 2 Engine coolant (secondary cooling system) 15.1 qt (14.3 L) Engine coolant additive (secondary cooling system) 16.0 fl oz (473 ml) 1 2 Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle 2.7 qt (2.6 L) Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker) 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L) 432 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker) 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L) Rear axle- Dana M275 3.61 qt (3.42 L) Rear axle- Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L) Automatic transmission fluid 17.4 qt (16.5 L) Transfer case fluid 3 4,5 1.9 qt (1.8 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel Tank (142 inch and 148 inch wheelbase, middle location) 29.0 gal (109.8 L) Fuel Tank (160 inch and 164 inch wheelbase, middle location) 34.0 gal (128.7 L) Fuel Tank (176 inch wheelbase, middle location) 48 gal (181.7 L) Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle location) 106.0 qt (100.3 L) Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location) 40.0 gal (151.4 L) Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Middle and Aft- axle -locations) 66.5 gal (251.7 L) Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (complete vehicle) 7.4 gal (28 L) Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (incomplete vehicle) 7.2 gal (27.3 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required 433 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity A/C refrigerant 27 oz (0.77 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil 3.4 fl oz (100 ml) 6 1 Use the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Using any other coolant may result in vehicle damage. 2 Per addition if required. 3 For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A this added friction modifier should be included in the total lube volume 3.58 L (3.78 qt). 4 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 5 Capacities may be higher if the vehicle is equipped with a cooler. Always check to make sure the fluid level is in the acceptable range. 6 This system uses mineral-based refrigerant oil to lubricate O-rings and fittings. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C171-F1 Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil XO-10W30-QSD 1 Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C171-F1 Motorcraft® SAE 10W-30 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil CXO-10W30-LSD12 1 Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C171-F1 Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil XO-15W40-QSD 1,3 Recommended motor oil (Canada): WSS-M2C171-F1 Motorcraft® SAE 15W-40 Super Duty Diesel Motor Oil CXO-15W40-LSD12 1,3 Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C171-F1 1,2,3 Motorcraft® SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil XO-5W40-5QSD Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C171-F1 434 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification 1 Motorcraft® SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Diesel Motor Oil XO-0W40-DAS Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine and secondary cooling system coolant (Canada): WSS-M97B44-D2 Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B Engine and secondary cooling system coolant additive -(U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® Specialty Orange Engine Coolant Revitalizer VC-12 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF): Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid PM-27-Gal / PM-27-Jug WSS-M99C130-A Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (U.S.): Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver PM-22-A -- Cetane Booster & Performance Improver (Canada): Motorcraft® Cetane Booster & Performance Improver PM-22-B -- Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (U.S.): Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver PM-23-A -- Anti-Gel & Performance Improver (Canada): Motorcraft® Anti-Gel & Performance Improver PM-23-B -- Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Front axle fluid : WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant 435 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification XY-75W85-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M275) (Canada): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada) : WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Friction Modifier Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 EST-M2C118-A Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-QLVC Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSB-M8B16-A2 Transfer case fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Transfer case fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Power steering fluid: Motorcraft® MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Spindle bearing: WSS-M2C192-A 436 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease XG-11 Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 -- Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A -- Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake pedal shift: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E WSD-M1C227-A 3 For biodiesel fuel blends (B20 max), use SAE 5W-40 or SAE 15W-40 oil that meets Ford specification WSS-M2C171-F1. 1 See the SAE viscosities grades chart for correct temperature usage. 2 For severe duty service, use SAE 5W-40 oil that meets Ford specification WSS-M2C171-F1. 437 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. Note: An engine block heater is recommended at temperatures below –10°F (–23°C). Engine Oil Specifications The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel engines is important for satisfactory operation. Determine which oil viscosity best suits the temperature range you expect to encounter for the next service interval from the following SAE viscosity grade chart. E163370 438 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L Capacities WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 7.0 qt (6.6 L) Engine coolant 26.7 qt (25.3 L) Brake fluid Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle 2.7 qt (2.6 L) Rear axle-10.5 inch (E-Locker) 3.3–3.5 qt (3.1–3.3 L) Rear axle-10.5 inch (non E-Locker) 3.5–3.6 qt (3.3–3.4 L) Rear axle-Dana M300 3.78 qt (3.58 L) Automatic transmission fluid 17.4 qt (16.5 L) Transfer case fluid 1 2 1.9 qt (1.8 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, middle location) 26.5 gal (100.3 L) 439 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, Aft- axle location) 40 gal (151.4 L) A/C refrigerant 27 oz (0.77 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil 4.1 fl oz (120 ml) 1 For complete refill of limited slip Ford axles, add 7.1 fl oz. (210 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent, meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. This added friction modifier should be included in the total lube volume of 3.78 qt (3.58 L). 2 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-A Optional motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-A Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFS WSS-M2C946-A Optional motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFS12 WSS-M2C946-A Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 440 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Front axle fluid : WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (10.50 inch axle) (E-Locker/non E-Locker): WSS-M2C942-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M300 With HD Tow Option) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-Q Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (Dana M300) (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Friction Modifier Motorcraft® Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 EST-M2C118-A Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.) : WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 Transfer case fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Transfer case fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid CXT-10-LV12 WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV 441 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Power steering fluid: Motorcraft® MERCON LV XT-10-QLVC WSS-M2C938-A MERCON LV Spindle bearing: High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease XG-11 WSS-M2C192-A Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant CYN-16-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Transmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake pedal shift: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E WSD-M1C227-A 442 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Capacities and Specifications If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which is not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22°F (-30°C) or below. E142732 Materials Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20 XO-0W20-QSP 443 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing WSS-M2C947-A Capacities and Specifications E240522 444 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System • • GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM: 530-1710 kHz FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz Note: Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing. AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an authorized dealer for more information. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. 445 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. • Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. 446 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System E235504 A SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM. B AUX: Press to access the AUX and SYNC features, it also cancels the menu or list browsing. C CLOCK: Press to display the clock. D TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. E select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you 447 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing F MENU: Press to access different audio system features. G Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. H Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and off. Audio System Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/SYNC Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E217906 448 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System A B C D Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information. G Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number. Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode). OK and cursor arrows: Press the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set, or press MENU to exit. E TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. F Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. 449 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing CD slot: Insert a CD. H Eject: Press to eject a CD. I Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and off. J PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your SYNC information. K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure. L MEDIA: Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple times to change to CD or to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source. M Clock: Press to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock Settings. If not in phone mode, press to display the clock. N RADIO: Press to listen to the radio or change radio stations. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions. O SIRIUS: Press to listen to SIRIUS satellite radio. Audio System P Q Menu Structure CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle. Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different. Press MENU. SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently. Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options. Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press OK to confirm a selection. Radio Manual Tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country). RDS Text Display Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. 450 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account. Check Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Alerts Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Skip No Stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lockout Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Speed Compensated Volume Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. DSP Choose between the stereo modes. Audio Settings 451 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Clock Settings Set Date and Time Select to set the time and calendar date. 24 Hour Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode. Display Settings Brightness Select to change display brightness. Language Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Temp. Setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. 452 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E217907 453 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System A Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and off. B Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. C Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. D TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. E MEDIA: Press to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM. F CD slot: Insert a CD. G Eject: Press to eject a CD. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. DIGITAL RADIO Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 454 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access a station you save if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. 455 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System Potential Station Issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * * http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped) SiriusXM® broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. 456 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. E208625 457 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. 458 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing No action required. Audio System USB PORT WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E205592 Note: The rear console USB ports are for charging only. See Center Console (page 172). The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See your SYNC information. 459 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION E198355 • SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist and applications, such as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC * AppLink. • • • • Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). * These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Text message. Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. 460 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Privacy Information Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. 461 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 476). USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you. Initiating a Voice Session E142599 Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display. Global Voice Commands These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time. Global voice commands (cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds. help This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions. (main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit. • Helpful Hints • • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. • 462 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. When prompted, say: E142599 Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guidance. Confirmation Prompts Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short question. Phone Confirmation Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls. 463 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then any of the following: phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed. phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. Changing the Voice Settings In addition to using voice commands to change the voice settings, you can also use the menu in the audio display. To change the voice settings press the Menu button then select: USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Menu Item SYNC-Settings Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. • Caller ID. Voice settings Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. Fan speed can also be adjusted normally during a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan speed to desired setting. 464 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) 4. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. Pairing a Phone for the First Time Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 4000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Using Voice Commands Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Using the Audio System Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. Press the voice and when prompted say: 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates there is no paired phone, select the option to add. 3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone to start the pairing process. Voice Command Action and Description (pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone | Bluetooth audio) | add phone) Follow the instructions on the audio display. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. 465 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Phone Voice Commands Pairing Subsequent Phones Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. E142599 Voice Command Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the voice button. When prompted, say any of the following: (phone | Blackberry | iPhone) Then say any of the following: Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Press the PHONE button. Select the option for Bluetooth Devices. Press the OK button. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. call (___) call ___ at home call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work) call ___ on (cell | mobile) call ___ on other dial [[a] number] ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone | privacy on) 1 2 (hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2 join (calls | call) 2 mute call [on] 2 (mute call off | un-mute call) 2 (turn ringer on | silent mode off) (turn ringer off | silent mode [on]) 466 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command [text] (messages | message) To access text messages say: 3 Voice Command help [text] (messages | message) ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Home". Then say any of the following: 1 forward (text | [text] message) (listen to | read) ([text] message) See Dial table below. 2 These commands are only valid while in a phone call. 3 reply to (text | [text] message) call [sender] See the text message table below. Phonebook Hints Dial Commands To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press: Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands: Voice Commands Menu Item 411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one) Hear it 700 (seven hundred) Changing Devices Using Voice Commands 800 (eight hundred) 900 (nine hundred) Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch devices say: Clear (deletes all entered digits) Delete (deletes last set of digits entered) Number <0-9> Plus Pound (#) Star (*) Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press any button on the audio system. 467 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display. Voice Command (connect | device) ___ Receiving Calls You can state the name of the desired device, such as “My iPhone”,“My Galaxy” or“My iPod”. SYNC may ask you to confirm the type of device (Phone, USB, or Bluetooth Audio). Accepting calls When receiving a call, you can answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. To use the screen to accept a call select: Making Calls Menu Item Accept E142599 Press the voice button. When prompted, say: Rejecting Calls When receiving a call, you can reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. Voice Command call [[a] name] dial [[a] number] To use the screen to reject a call select: SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it. You can then say: Menu Item Reject Ignore the call by doing nothing. Phone Options during an Active Call When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following: During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, such as putting a call on hold or joining calls. Voice Command (dial | send) This initiates the call. (delete | correct) To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select More to choose from the following options: This erases the spoken digits. To end the call, press the end call button 468 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the microphone on, select the option again. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is private. Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is on hold. Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad (for example, numbers for passwords). Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty or conference call. 1. Select the More option. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the More option. 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access your call history log. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu. 2. Select one of the options available. Accessing Features through the Phone Menu You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings. 469 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and action Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad. Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to access an alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad. Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages. BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete). Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone. Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. Text Messaging Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message. SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. To hear the message you can say: Voice command Receiving a Text Message Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. (listen to | read) ([text] message) 470 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Description and action Select this option to have the system read the message to you. SYNC™ (If Equipped) Using the screen you also have the following options: Menu Item Description and action Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox. View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select: More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options: Reply to sender Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send. Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the message. Forward msg. Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number. 2. Select the text messaging option, and then press the OK button. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages 1. Press the PHONE button. Choose from the following options: Menu Item Description and action New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages. View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message. Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your text messages. More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cellular phone. 471 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Sending a Text Message Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox. Note: You can only send a text message to one recipient at a time. 1. Select the send option when the desired selection highlights in the audio display. 2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears. 3. Press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you want to send the message. A pre-defined signature appears on each text message. Accessing Your Phone Settings These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone and text message notification, modify your phonebook, and set up automatic download. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, and then press the OK button. Scroll to select from the following options: Menu Item Description and action Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone as the master when there is more than one cellular phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the Bluetooth Devices menu. Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu. Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone option. 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone. Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to switch the audible tone off or on. Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add, delete or download). Press the OK button to select and scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences table below. 472 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Phonebook preferences Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings. Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system. Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since your last download. When automatic download is off, the system does not download your phonebook when your cellular phone connects to SYNC. You can only access your phonebook, call history and text messages when your paired cellular phone connects to the system. Check or uncheck this option to download your phonebook automatically each time your phone connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent. Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your contacts are displayed. You can select: First/Last name Last/First name 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears, and then press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as set a phone as primary. Select from the following options: Menu Item Add Description and action Pair additional phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process. 473 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action 2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears, select either yes or no. 5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair it again. Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone as master by selecting the master option and confirming it as the primary. Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous phone disconnects from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time. Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone, you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing process. 2. Select the SYNC settings option, and then press the OK button. System Settings 1. Press the MENU button. 474 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Scroll to select from the following options: Display Description and action Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then press the OK button to change the option's status. Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to factory default settings. Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates. Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation successfully. System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select. Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 462). Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder. You can select media content for playback from this menu. 475 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (If Equipped) Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. • SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications such as Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is compatible). Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when your vehicle is started and after a previously paired phone connects. These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. 911 Assist If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 46). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 303). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. 476 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Setting 911 Assist On or Off • Press Menu then select Menu Item • Action and Description SYNC-Applications 911 Assist Select the desired option, on or off. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services. If you choose not to activate this feature you will have the following options: Menu Item A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Action and Description Voice Provides a display and voice Reminder reminder at phone connection ON at vehicle start. Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel". Voice Provides a display reminder Reminder only without a voice reminder OFF at phone connection. To make sure that 911 Assist works properly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • 477 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. SYNC™ (If Equipped) 911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. Note: AppLink is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch system. To Access Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the menu on-screen. Then select: SYNC Mobile Apps Menu Item The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Scroll through the list of available applications and select a particular app or select: Find New Apps Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford website. Accessing an App's Menu When an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button on the steering wheel control to access the app menu. Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region. You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow button on the steering wheel control to exit the app menu. 478 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button then when prompted say: Menu Item Action and Description Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip". mobile (apps | applications) help Use this command to discover the available voice commands. SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands The following voice commands are always available: Menu Item Action and Description mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC. list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps. find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps. help You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC. When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example: • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status. • To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position. App Permissions App permissions are organized by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. 479 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) • • To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed. To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or location based apps. Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select: Menu Item Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps All Apps You can also select a specific app. If the app supports push notifications, this setting is listed. Select to enable or disable the feature as required. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. App Status You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu. 480 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) There are three possible statuses: Menu Item Action and Description Update Needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. Up-To-Date No update is required. Updating... The system is trying to receive an update. Update settings Menu Item Action and Description Request Update Select this option from the settings menu to manually preform a needed update. Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu to disable automatic updates. Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC. Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications: • USB 2.0. • File format must be FAT16/32. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artist and album. The format of the audio files on the USB device must be: • MP3. • Non DRM protected WMA. • WAV. • AAC. Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 15,000 songs. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod, Zune, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. 481 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 2. Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display. Press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice Command Action and Description (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See the media voice commands. Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick. To view USB content select: Message Browse USB Description and Action Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback audio automatically. Message You can browse the files on the USB device in categories. Select BROWSE from the buttons at the bottom of the audio display and choose from the following: Albums Genres Browse USB Message Reset USB Play all Media Voice Commands Playlists Press the voice button and when prompted say: Songs E142599 Artists 482 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Description and Action (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate [player]) voice commands. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or "what is playing". Command pause play Description and Action Pauses device playback. Resumes device playback. play [album] ___ play all Play all media on the device from the first track to the last. play [artist] ___ play [genre] ___ play [playlist] ___ next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the next track on the current media. previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the previous track on current media. [play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the one currently playing. play [song | track | title | file] ___ repeat off repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track. 483 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Command Description and Action shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order. (Not all devices support this command.) shuffle off ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the current track. • • ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles". Bluetooth Audio The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through Bluetooth. Examples of USB Commands SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice. For example, if we have a song called "Penny Lane" from the album "Magical Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song: • • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour". Play "Magical Mystery Tour". To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press the MEDIA button and select: Menu Item BT audio Play song "Penny Lane". Play "Penny Lane". Then any of the following: If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say: Voice Command pause play next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display to start USB playback. Media Menu Features The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat), find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices. 484 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Message Options Description and Action This will enter the media menu. Then any of the following: Message Description and Action Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library. 2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) to select USB playback. Accessing Your USB Song Library 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Message Browse USB Description and Action This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist or track. If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. 485 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) If there are media files, you have the following options: Display Play all Description and Action Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time * in numerical order. Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears in the display. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL, * or MTP). 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the OK button. Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK button. Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists * * and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK button. Albums Sort all indexed media files by album. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the OK button. Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the OK button. Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not visible.) 1. Press the OK button to select. * * 486 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and Action 2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and then press the OK button. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library. * You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. USB 2 (If Equipped) Using Voice Commands Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console. You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands: You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port. You can access both USB devices by using voice commands. Accessing and Viewing USB Media (browse | search | show) all (album | albums) To access a USB device press the voice button and when prompted say: (browse | search | show) all (artist | artists) Voice command USB 1 (browse | search | show) all (genre | genres) USB 2 (browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it. (browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) (browse | search | show) album ___ Bluetooth Devices and System Settings (browse | search | show) artist ___ (browse | search | show) genre ___ You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 464). (browse | search | show) playlist ___ 487 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Commands for Audio Sources Voice Command ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command. help E142599 * Press the voice button and when prompted say: If equipped. Radio Voice Commands Voice Command If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then E142599 say any of the commands in the following table. (music | audio | entertainment) [system] Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use. If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) Voice Command Radio [tune [to]] AM 2 Bluetooth (audio | stereo) You can then say any of the following commands. (disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2 [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM]) Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___ tune [to] SAT * [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___ Sirius * [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] FM1 (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___ 488 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Voice Commands [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___ [tune [to]] FM preset ___ FM ___ HD ___ tune [to] [Sirius] Help * [tune [to]] Sirius [channel] ___ [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ HD ___ * You can say the channel number (0233) to listen to that Sirius station. [tune [to]] preset ___ CD Voice Commands Tune If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say any of the commands in the following table. help * E142599 If equipped. Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands (If equipped) E142599 If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: To listen to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: Voice Command (disc | CD [player]) play Voice Commands You can then say any of the following commands. Sirius pause When you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, you can press the voice button, and say any of the commands in the following table. play [play] next track [play] previous track Voice Commands tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___ [tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on] [tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on] [tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off [tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks | songs) [on]] [tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___ 489 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information. Voice Command (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on] (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] shuffle off SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature. empty or missing contacts. 490 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. 491 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. Text messaging is not working on SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. This may be a possible device malfunction. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your feature. phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. 492 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The device is not connected. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. Make sure that all song details are populated. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Review the phone voice commands and the media You may be using the wrong voice commands at the voice commands. beginning of their respective sections. SYNC does not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. Review the media voice SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong commands at the beginning the name of a song or artist. voice commands. of the media section. 493 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to The system may not be say "L-O-L-A". reading the name the same way you are saying it. Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section. You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are voice commands. listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe or is calling the wrong Wilson". contact when I want to Using the SYNC phone make a call. menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble name differently than the understanding. SYNC will way you saved it. read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. 494 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as may be very short and similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them. special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone paired and connected to New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC. SYNC in order to find find any applications. AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. Ensure you have downloaded and installed the AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app My phone is connected, but not installed and running on from your phone's app store. I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or 495 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.' over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. Don't forget to restart the example. app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth bug on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off Bluetooth. 496 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone phone is back in to the phone. After a connected, my app is The USB connection to few seconds, the app should running, I restarted the app SYNC may need to be reset. appear in SYNC's Mobile but I still cannot find it on Apps Menu. If not, "Force SYNC. Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of phone listed in SYNC's available Bluetooth ports, Mobile Apps Menu. you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system. 497 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Getting to Know Your System GENERAL INFORMATION The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact with a variety of features using the touchscreen and voice commands. By integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled phone, the touchscreen provides easy interaction with audio, multimedia, climate control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC 3 compatible apps. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Using the Touchscreen To operate the touchscreen, you can simply touch the item or option that you want to select. The button changes color when you select it. The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly select the feature you wish to use. E205444 498 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Item Menu Item Action and Description A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages. B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view. C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See Settings (page 546). D Outside Temperature This displays the current outside temperature. E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature. The Status Bar The touchscreen allows you quick access to all of your comfort, navigation, communication and entertainment options. Using the status and feature bar you can quickly select the feature you want to use. Additional icons also display in the status bar depending on market, vehicle options and current operation. If a feature is not active, the icon does not display. Certain icons may move to the left or right depending on what options are active. Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open). 499 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) i E249671 Callout Item Description A Driver Temperature This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system. B Heated steering wheel When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering wheel. (If equipped) C Passenger Temperature When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are linked, the passenger's temperature does not display. D Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you. E Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted. 500 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Callout Item Description F Download This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details about the new software. G Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected. H Wi-Fi in Range An available Wi-Fi network is within range. I Signal Strength This icon displays the phone and roaming signal strength. J Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone. K 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC. L In-Call This icon displays when a phone call is active. M Bluetooth This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth connection. Messages may also appear in the status bar to provide you with notifications. You can select the message to view the associated feature. Feature Bar Feature Bar Item Functions Audio Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs, and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB connection. Climate Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within the vehicle. Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook of your connected device. 501 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Feature Bar Item Navigation (If equipped) Functions Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along your route. Apps Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped). Settings You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact with your vehicle. When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the status bar indicating the status of the voice command session. See Using Voice Recognition (page 510). Cleaning the Touchscreen You can remove fingerprints with a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again. Using the Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use different controls on your steering wheel to interact with the touchscreen system in different ways. Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen. Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen. VOL: Control the volume of audio output. Mute: Mute the audio output. Using Voice Recognition Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press again to stop the voice prompt and immediately begin speaking. Press and hold to end a voice session. Using voice commands allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). SEEK NEXT: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. 502 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) SEEK PREVIOUS: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. • • PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or switch between calls. 911 Assist PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject an incoming call. WARNINGS Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE ACCEPT. M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media sources (modes). Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Steering Wheel (page 82). Using Your Bezel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your instrument panel: • • • • • • • DISP: Switch the display on or off. You can also touch the screen to switch the display back on. Temperature, fan and climate control buttons: Control the temperature, fan speed or settings of the climate control system. See Climate Control (page 146). Power: Switch the audio system on and off. VOL: Control the volume of playing audio. Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in audio modes. Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system. SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to advance through available media modes. SOUND: Press to access the Sound menu where you can adjust sound and other audio settings. 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory preset. See Audio System (page 445). Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. 503 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) • Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar. • Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. • If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting: A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel." See Supplementary Restraints System (page 46). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 303). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. To switch 911 Assist on and off please view the settings information. See Settings (page 546). If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. 504 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. • • 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle. Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information. For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC 3. Speed-restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary. Safety Information WARNING • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • • Screens crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports scores, movie times or ski conditions. Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information. All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries). See the following table for more specific examples. 505 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone. Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls. System Functionality Editing the keypad code. Enabling Valet Mode. Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active. Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings. Editing the list of wireless networks. Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network. Text Messages Viewing received text messages. Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination. Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas. Website Creating a SYNC Owner Account www.syncmaroute.ca Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • • • Essential for keeping up with the latest software and connected features. Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Maintain account permissions. SYNC Connect with Ford Pass (If Equipped) With a SYNC Connect-equipped vehicle, you can use Ford Pass to track your vehicle’s location and remotely access vehicle features such as start, lock and unlock and vehicle status including fuel level and approximate mileage. You can also schedule specific times to remotely start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon as you are. Ford Pass is available through a free download via the Apple App Store® or Google Play™. Message and data rates may apply. Services may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area. Visit the website to sign up and register. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca 506 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Updating Your System Updating Over Wi-Fi You can choose to download the update onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic updates. To update your System over Wi-Fi your vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi access point. Data rates may apply. USB Updates To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select: To use the USB update you need to log into your owner account and visit the SYNC software update page. Menu Item Settings Website Wi-Fi www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Available Wi-Fi Networks The website notifies you if an update is available. You can then select to download the update. You will need an empty USB drive. Please check the website for minimum requirements. Once you have inserted the USB drive into your computer, choose to start the download. Follow the instructions provided to download the files to the USB drive. You can then select your Wi-Fi network. You may have to enter the security code if the network is secured. The system confirms when it has connected to the network. You must also give the system permission to update automatically. Upon vehicle delivery, the System asks you if you would like to use the automatic update feature. If you agree to automatic updates, you can press OK to confirm. If this selection does not appear upon vehicle delivery you can access it through the General Settings. See Settings (page 546). You can also perform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 560). The installation of most files occurs in the background, and does not interrupt your use of the system. Navigation updates cannot be installed in the background, because the files are too large. To install the update in your vehicle, remove anything that is plugged in the USB ports on the media hub and plug in the USB drive containing the update. When the USB drive is plugged in, the installation should begin immediately. After a successful installation, the update is available the next time the vehicle is started. Please refer to the website for any further actions. 507 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Support If you would like to switch this feature on later, select: The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own. Menu Item Settings Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST. General For Ford: Automatic System Updates United States: 1-800-392-3673. From this menu, you can enable automatic updates. If you already are not currently connected to WiFi access point, the system prompts you to set up a Wi-Fi connection when you enable this feature. Canada: 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. Privacy Information When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. When the system is connected via Wi-Fi and automatic updates are enabled, your system checks for software updates periodically. If a new version is available, it downloads at that time. Software downloads can take place for up to 30 minutes after you have switched your vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download does not complete for any reason, the download continues where it left off at the next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon activation of an update, a banner displays on the touchscreen indicating the system update. Select the icon to see more detail. This icon displays for two ignition cycles. The cellular profile, media device index, and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. To switch this feature off: Menu Item Settings General Automatic System Updates If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. You can find more information about the Master Reset in General Settings. See Settings (page 546). System In this menu selection, you can change the selection for automatic updates to OFF. 508 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. HOME SCREEN E205446 Item A Tile Audio Home screen display Shows the active media source. 509 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Item Tile Home screen display If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass. B C 1 The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging and roaming. Phone 1 Navigation This map displays your current location or current route in real time. When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and distance to your destination. If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information. If equipped. You can access each feature controlled by SYNC 3 through a variety of commands. You can touch any of the feature displays to access that feature. To activate the SYNC 3 voice commands push the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel and wait for the prompt. Anytime you select the home button, the system returns you to this screen. USING VOICE RECOGNITION ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can be the name of anything, such as artist, the name of contact or number. The context and the description of the command tell you what to say for this dynamic option. The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice commands, to control features like audio and climate controls. By using voice commands, you can keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road. Voice Command There are some commands that work for every feature, these commands are: Action and Description Main Menu Brings you to the main menu. Go back Returns you to the previous screen. Cancel Ends the voice session. List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands. ___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For example, you could say: 510 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Voice Command Action and Description Phone List of Commands Navigation List of Commands Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen. Audio Voice Commands Included here are some of the most popular commands for each SYNC 3 feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for audio voice commands it can be the name of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a radio frequency number, or the name of an artist, album, song or a genre. To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Sirius Channel ___ Description 1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16". You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse". AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580". FM ___ FM ___ HD ___ 1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”. Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device. USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device. Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song, Penny Lane". Play Playlist ___ Play Artist ___ Play Album ___ 511 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Voice command Description Play Podcast ___ Play Song ___ Play Audiobook ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk". Browse ___ 1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for climate voice commands it can be the desired degrees for the temperature setting. Climate Voice Commands You can control the temperature of the vehicle using voice commands. To adjust the temperature, say: Voice command Description Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C). Phone Voice Commands Pairing a Phone You can use voice commands to connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system. To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Pair Phone Description Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 546). Making Calls ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for phone voice commands it can be the name of the contact you wish to call or the digits you want to dial. 512 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following: Voice command Description Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny". Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home". Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”. Please make sure that you are saying the contact name exactly as it appears in your contact list. Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands: Voice Command Description <0-9> If the full number was not entered with the first command, you can continue saying the number. Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call. Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated. Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number. Text Message Voice Commands To access text message options, press the voice button and say: Voice command Description Listen to Message Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you would like to hear. Reply to Message 513 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Navigation Voice Commands (If point of interest. Equipped) ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for navigation voice commands it can be a POI category or a major brand name, where major brand name is a chain with more than 20 locations Setting a Destination You can use any of the following commands to set a destination or find a You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category: Voice command Description Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific state or province. Find a ___ State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants". Find a POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality. Find an Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality. Find the NearestState the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for. Show Previous Destinations Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations. Show Favorites Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations. Drive Home Allows you to route to your home address. Drive to Work Allows you to route to your work address. In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active: Voice command Description Cancel Route Cancels the current route. Detour Allows you to select an alternate route. Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt. Show Route Displays the active route. Route Summary Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers. 514 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Voice command Description Where Am I Provides current location. Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map. Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map. Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped) The following voice commands are always available: Voice command Description Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3. List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps. Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3: Voice command Description Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the app mobile app on SYNC 3. Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3. help SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Activation and a subscription are required. 515 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link: Voice command Show Traffic Description Displays a list of traffic incidents. Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map. Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices. Show 5 Day Forecast Displays the 5 day weather forecast. Help Voice Settings Commands You can say the following commands to access the voice settings: Voice command Description Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality. Interaction Mode Standard Sets standard prompting with longer prompts. Interaction Mode Advanced Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts. Call Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call. Call Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call. Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands. Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands. Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. Fan speed can also be adjusted normally during a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan speed to desired setting. You can use the volume control to adjust the volume of the system voice prompts. While prompt is active, adjust the volume control up or down to your desired setting. 516 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. ENTERTAINMENT E205443 Message Message and description A Sources B Direct Tune C Presets 517 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Sources You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands. Press this button to select the source of media you want to listen to. Menu item AM FM SIRIUS 1 CD 1 USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here. Bluetooth Stereo Apps 1 This If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections. feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. Once you have entered the station's call numbers, you can select: AM/FM Radio Tuning a Station Menu item You can use the tune or seek controls on the radio bezel to select a station. Action and description Enter Press to begin playing the station you have entered. Menu item Cancel Press to exit without changing the station. A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of a station. You can only enter a valid station for the source you are currently listening to. Presets To tune a station using the touchscreen, select: Direct Tune To set a new preset, tune to the station and then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and then returns. You can press the backspace button to delete the previously entered number. 518 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) There are two preset banks available for AM and three banks for FM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Note: This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. This includes canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. E234451 Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. The following buttons are available for SiriusXM: Menu item Action and description Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations. Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station. Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select: Enter The system tunes to the station you select. Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play. You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number. 519 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu item Replay Action and description Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio. When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you to the live broadcast. Live ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel. Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 546). There are three preset banks available for SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. Memory Presets To set a preset, tune to the station then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and returns once the station is stored. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. See Settings (page 546). SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interference Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute. 520 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Troubleshooting tips Message Acquiring Signal Cause Action Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or system failure present. SIRIUS system failure Invalid Channel No action required. This message should disappear shortly. If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or able. choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. Satellite acquiring signal… The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area, tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call 1888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. None found. Check channel guide. All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on locked. that station. SIRIUS Subscription updated SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. No action required. HD Radio™ Information (If Available) To activate HD radio, please see the Radio Settings in the Settings Chapter. See Settings (page 546). Note: This feature may not be available in all markets. Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 521 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit: The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. Website www.hdradio.com Note: There is also an additional feature for stations that have more than 1 HD multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this button allows you cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. For example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly causes the radio to cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic increasing order. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen: E142616 When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: Message Presets Action and description Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 522 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential station issues Issues Cause Action Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Sound fading or blending in and out. The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. 523 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Potential station issues Issues Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. Cause Action The previously stored multicast No action required. The station preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current available in your current recep- location. tion area. 1 Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. not match currently broadcaster. playing audio. There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. 1 information shown for broadcaster. currently selected frequency. 1 You can find the form here: Website http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback CD (If equipped) HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. Once you select this option, the system returns you to the main audio screen. The current audio information appears on the screen. The following buttons are also available: Button Function Browse You can use the browse button to select a track. Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat. 524 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Button Function For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays). Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order. Bluetooth Stereo or USB You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to access media that you store on your Bluetooth device or USB device such as music, audio books or podcasts. The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB: Button Function Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number one). Shuffle Play the tracks in random order. For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide 30-second skip buttons when you listen to audio books or podcasts. These buttons allow you to skip forward or backward within a track. You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. To get more information about the currently playing track, press the cover art or Info button. While playing audio from a USB device you can look for certain music by selecting the following: Button Function Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist. New Search This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories. Play All 525 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Button Function Playlists Artist Albums Songs Genres Podcasts Audio books Composers A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the category you are browsing. Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your USB device. Select this option to play audio from your USB device. USB Ports Apps The system supports the use of certain audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or bluetooth-enabled device. Each app gives you different on-screen options depending on the app's content. See Apps (page 543). Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information E211463 The system is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod, iPhone, and most USB drives. The USB ports are in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. This feature allows you to plug in USB media devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature. Supported audio file extensions include MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC. 526 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Supported USB file systems include: FAT, exFAT, and NTFS. CLIMATE SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media from your USB device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file. Touch the climate button on the touchscreen to access your climate control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen may look different from one of the screens shown below. Your screen may not contain all of the features shown. If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty metadata tags as unknown. Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings (page 546). SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices. E206820 527 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) A Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. B Heated steering wheel: Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F (23°C) in temperatures as low as -4°F (-22°C). The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F (32°C) and operates independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel. set to HI. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on. Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your vehicle off. D AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. E Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. F DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch it off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button. Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions. C Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature. Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options. MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the driver and passenger temperatures are 528 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing G Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. H Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle. SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) J Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX A/C. I A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options. Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually, together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire. Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. PHONE WARNING A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning A/C button off. Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the interior. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of the system. Once you pair your cell phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone’s functionality. Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or the system may not allow Recirculated air to turn on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. 529 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Dialing a number. • Call waiting notification. • Caller identification. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Websites Menu Item owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Add Phone Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices Phone Menu 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. This menu becomes available after pairing a phone. 530 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) G E251249 Item A Menu Item Recent Call List Action and Description Displays your recent calls. You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list. You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose: All B Contacts Incoming Phone Settings Missed All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order. A-Z Jump C Outgoing Selecting this button allows you to choose a specific letter to view. Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options. From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. 531 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Item Menu Item Action and Description D Change Device Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a device. E Text Messages Displays all recent text messages. F Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number. Use the backspace button to delete numbers. Call G Do Not Disturb Press this button to begin a call. Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent. Users with phones having voice services may see a button to access the feature. For example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A press and hold of the voice button on the steering wheel also accesses this feature. Making Calls There are many ways to make calls from the SYNC 3 system, including using voice commands. See Using Voice Recognition (page 510). You can use the touchscreen to place calls as well. 532 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) To accept the call, select: To call a number in your contacts, select: Menu Item Contacts Menu Item Action and Description Accept You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call. Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To reject the call, select: Menu Item Reject Note: You can also reject the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To call a number from your recent calls, select: Menu Item Action and Description Recent Call List You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3 logs it as a missed call. During a Phone Call During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select: Menu Item The phone status items are also visible: • • • Action and Description Phone Keypad Select the digits of the number you wish to call. Call The system begins the call. Signal Strength. Battery. 911 Assist (United States and Canada only). See Settings (page 546). You can select any of the following during an active phone call: Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed. Receiving Calls During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available. 533 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Item Item End Call Privacy Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel. Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to SYNC 3. Text Messaging Keypad Press this to access the phone keypad. Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features. Mute You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you. Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h). Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select: Menu Item Action and Description Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you. View View the text on the touchscreen. Call To call the sender. Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully. Close To exit the screen. Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable some SYNC 3 features. SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto to access your phone. Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto features use mobile data. When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, you can: • Make calls. • Send and receive messages. • Listen to music. • Use your phone's voice assistant. Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest iOS version is recommended. 1. 534 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Plug your phone into a USB port. See USB Port (page 459). SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) 2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen. 3. Follow the prompts that appear on your phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay. Menu Item Android Auto Preferences Enable Android Auto After completing the setup, your phone connects to CarPlay automatically when plugged into a USB port. Note: Android Auto must be switched on after plugging in your device. To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: Menu Item Menu Item Apple CarPlay Preferences Android Auto Preferences Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your device and select: Your device is listed if SYNC detects Android Auto. Select the name of your device and select: Disable Disable To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC app. Note: You may need to slide your Settings screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay Preferences or Android Auto Preferences. Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay support. To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch the option to return to SYNC. Android Auto Android Auto is compatible with most devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Note: Contact Google for Android Auto support. 1. Download the Android Auto app to your device from Google Play to prepare your device (this may require mobile data usage). Note: The Android Auto App may not be available within your current market. NAVIGATION Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode. 2. Plug your device into a USB port. See USB Port (page 459). 3. To switch this feature on from the Settings screen, scroll left on the screen and select: 535 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Map Mode North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks and 3D city models (when available). 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use, landscape features, and detailed railroad infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe. E207749 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. Adjust this viewing angle and rotate the map 180 degrees by E207748 touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourism value. 3D city models are complete 3D models of entire city areas including navigable roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D landmarks and city models appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage of these varies and improves with updated map releases. E207751 E251780 Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle’s current location. Mute: Press to mute the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute the guidance. Select the zoom in icon to see a closer view of the map. E251779 E207752 Points of Interest (POI) grouping icon: You can choose up to three POI icons to display E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs are located close together or are at the same location a box is used to display a single category icon instead of repeating the same icon, in order to reduce clutter. When you select the box on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how many POIs are in this location. Select the pop up to see a list of the available POIs. You can scroll through and select POIs from this list. Select the zoom out icon to see a farther away view of the map. E207753 You can adjust the view in preset increments. You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the map. The information bar tells you the names of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over them with the crosshair curser. You can change your view of the map by tapping on the location indicator icon on the right hand side of the screen. You can choose from the following options: E207750 If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel, station icons automatically display on the map. Heading up (2D map) This always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km). 536 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow will be indicated on the map by green (clear), yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the information is available and varies across the US. You can choose to display traffic icons on the map representing twelve different types of incidents. See Settings (page 546). You can set a destination by hovering above a location and selecting: Button Start Destination Mode To set a destination, press: Menu Item Description Destination Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats: Search Street Address (number, street, city, state) For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI" Partial Address (number, street) if searching in current state (number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane". City (name or zip code) Point of Interest (name or category) Intersection (street 1 / street 2) (street 1 and street 2) (street 1 & street 2) (street 1 @ street 2) (street 1 at street 2) 537 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Description Latitude and Longitude (##.###### , ##.######) This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted. You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type. If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections. Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here. tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination. Delete All Home Select this option to remove all previous destinations. Select to navigate to your set Home destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays. To set your Home, press: Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays. To set your Work: Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved. To add Favorites: Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination Favorite bar. Search Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered. Save Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen. 538 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Description The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the favorites screen. Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle (POI) Categories configuration): Food Fuel Hotel ATM See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking for. Inside of these categories you can search by: Nearby Along Route Near Destination In a City Once you have chosen your destination, press: Menu Item Action and Description Save This saves the destination to your favorites. Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options. Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible. Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible. Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route. The time and distance for each route also displays. Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode screen. 539 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Once you have chosen you destination, press: Menu Item Start Action and Description The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination. During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving. The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your destination. SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually. During active navigation, touch the bottom of the screen to view the menu and other buttons. Navigation Menu In map mode and during active navigation you can access the navigation menu. To access the Navigation menu, press: Button Menu You can then select: Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation. Highway Exit Info Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation. Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations. You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired. Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route. You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears and you can press: Avoid The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list. 540 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Button Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present). When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route. Navigation Settings Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 546). Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road. The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route: Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen. View Route Press this to see a map of the full route. Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route. Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set waypoints. Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints. You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing: Optimize Order To return to Go your route press: 1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass) while on an active route. This brings up the destination menu. 2. Set your destination using any of the given methods. Once the destination has been selected, the screen allows you to set the destination as a waypoint by selecting: Waypoints You can add a waypoint to a navigation route as a destination along your route. To add a waypoint: 541 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the location. You can select up to five waypoints. You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order for you by pressing: To return to your route, press: Go SYNC AppLink cityseeker (If Equipped) The AppLink app allows you to use some SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone. Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) information is limited to approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico). First Mile Navigation When you switch your ignition off, the location of your vehicle is recorded and sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of your vehicle can be viewed within the app. You can also view walking directions to your vehicle. Last Mile Navigation E225487 When you park near your destination, the system provides walking directions to your destination. POI Search cityseeker, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions. Your paired phone can be used to access additional points of interest (POI). These points of interest can only be access when your phone is paired. When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address, phone number and a star rating. Send To Car Press More Information to see a photo, a review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price and the web address. This screen displays the point of interest icons. You can send destinations to your navigation system using a computer or phone using AppLink. 542 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) The system calculates a reasonable efficient route based on available speed limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may know a local short cut that is more efficient at a given time than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight difference in minutes or miles with the SYNC 3 route. For restaurants, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address. For hotels, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout times, hotel service icons and website address. Hotel service icons include: • • • • • • • • • • Navigation Map Updates Restaurant Business center Handicap facilities Laundry Refrigerator 24 hour room service Fitness center Internet access Pool Wi-Fi Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also visit: Website www.navigation.com/sync You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available. Attractions include nearby landmarks, amusement parks, historic buildings and more. cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation and admission price. HERE is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to HERE by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available on vehicles equipped with navigation and only in select markets. You must activate and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information. It helps you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see current sports scores. See Apps (page 543). Map coverage includes the USA (including Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands), Canada and Mexico. APPS The system enables voice, steering wheel, and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. 543 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will vary by market. Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to access AppLink. Menu Item Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Find Mobile Apps Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit: Websites Action and Description SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. The connected device sends data to Ford in the United States. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, odometer, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain this data for only as long as necessary to provide this service, troubleshoot, and improve products and services and to offer you products and services that may interest you where allowed by law. Note: We encourage you to review the smartphone app’s terms of service and privacy policies because Ford is not responsible for your app or its use of data. Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system feature. Accessing mobile apps through AppLink is only possible when Android Auto or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps may only be accessible in the car through AppLink and others only through Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the Smartphone Connectivity information to disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Note: Ford reserves the right to limit functionality or deactivate mobile apps at any time. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, the app needs to be running in the background of your phone. If you shut down the app on your phone, it shuts down the app on SYNC 3 as well. 544 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If You can enable and disable apps through settings. See Settings (page 546). Equipped) App Permissions WARNING The system organizes the app permissions into groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. While in the settings menu, you can also see the data included in each group. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example Vehicle information, Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You can enable all groups or none of them during the initial app permissions prompts. The settings menu offers individual group permission control. Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Note: You are only prompted to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC 3. Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, your vehicle must have navigation. Note: If you disable group permissions, apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings menu. Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information. Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games. 545 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Traffic on Route Traffic Nearby Action and Description Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed. Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route. Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available. Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the chosen area. Map Select to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Area Select to choose from a listing of weather locations. Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress. Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area. Sound SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust the following: Under this menu, you can access and adjust the settings for many of the system features. To access additional settings, swipe the screen left or right. Sound Settings Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels. Treble Adjusts the high frequency level. Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level. Bass Adjusts the low frequency level. Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back. 546 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Sound Settings Speed Compensated Vol. Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off. Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners. Sound Settings Stereo Surround Your vehicle might not have all of these features. Media Player This button is available when a media device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following options for active devices only. Menu Item Podcast Speed Action and Description For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose: Slower Normal Faster Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose: Cover Art Priority Gracenote® Management Slower Normal Faster Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music files. If no cover art for the files exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art. Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files. This overrides any cover art from your device. Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist, album. 547 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. base Info Device Information This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device. Update Media Index Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index. You can adjust the following features: Clock To adjust the time, select the up and down arrows on either side of the screen. The arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows on the right adjust the minute. You can then select AM or PM. Menu Item Action and Description Clock Format Select how time displays. Auto Time Zone Update When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes. This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation. Reset Clock to GPS Time When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time. Bluetooth The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings. Pressing this button allows you to access the following: Menu Item Bluetooth Action Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit new connections. Phone You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Bluetooth-enabled device. Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. 548 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: Website owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options. Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices Menu Item Action and Description View Devices You can then select: Add a Bluetooth Device You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in the previous table. You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options: Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected device. 549 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Disconnect Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device. Delete Removes the selected device from the system. Pressing the info icon next to the device name allows you to see phone and device information Menu Item Action and Description Manage Contacts You can then select: Auto-Download Contacts Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to date. Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose: First Name Last Name Re-download Contacts Select this option to re-download your contact list manually. Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone. Menu Item Action and Description Set Phone Ringtone You can then select: No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone. Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting. You can also select one of the three available ringers. 550 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Text Messaging You can then select: No Alert (Silence) No sound plays when a message comes to your phone. You can select one of the three available notification sounds. Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message. You can enable and disable the following options as well: Menu Item Action and Description Mute Audio in Privacy When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy. Roaming Warning When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call. Low Battery Notification When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low. Select this button to modify the on or off setting for this feature. If the mobile phone’s contacts have been downloaded, you can adjust the following option: 911 Assist Note: This service is only available in the United States and Canada. Menu Item Action and Description Set Emergency Contacts You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911 Assist call process. Radio This button is available if a Radio source such as AM or FM is the active media source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features: 551 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item FM HD Radio Action and Description Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts. AM HD Radio (Dependent on current radio source, If Available) Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio text. Autoset Presets Refresh (AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source. Sirius XM (If equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Set Category for After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which Seek are inside that selected category. Parental Lockout Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Edit Alerts Select to switch on, off or delete alerts. The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM. Navigation You can adjust many of the Navigation preferences by selecting the following menus. 552 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Map Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Map Preferences Then select any of the following: 3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings. Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots. POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting. Once this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed by selecting: Incident Map Icons Select POIs This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map. Route Preferences Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Route Preferences Then select any of the following: Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type. Shortest Always Use ___ Route Fastest Eco Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred route setting. When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination. Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance. Automatically Find Parking The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination. Eco Time Penalty Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route. 553 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow Guidance information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible. Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation route. Avoid Toll Roads If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation route. Avoid Ferries/Car Trains If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing a navigation route. Navigation Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts You can adjust how the system provides prompts. Then select any of the following: Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions. Voice Only Only voice instructions are given. Tones Only Only a tone sounds to prompt you. The connected devices sends data to Ford in the United States. The encrypted information includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. Mobile Apps You can enable the control of compatible mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: All Mobile Apps may not be compatible with the system. 554 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Menu Item Mobile Apps Action and Description Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu. Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options: Update Mobile Apps This provides information on the current state of available app updates. There are three possible statuses: Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps… The system has No update is detected a new app required. requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. The system is trying to receive an update. Request Update Select this button if an update is required and you want to request this update manually. For example, when your mobile device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select: 555 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Request Update All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once. There may also be SYNC 3 enabled apps listed under these options. Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. General Access and adjust the system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings. Menu Item Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Touch Panel Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection. About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software. Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system. Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data. System Wi-Fi Wi-Fi & Hotspot You can access the following: Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot settings and information. 556 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates. Available Networks This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range. Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may require a security code to connect. When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such as the signal strength, connection status and security type. Wi-Fi Available Notifications The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already connected. Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped) You can access the following: Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off. Settings Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password. Data Usage Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage. Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot. Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Hotspot) may be operational while ignition is On and may remain operational while the ignition is Off. Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility to remove the vehicle from the vehicle network carrier account when ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would like to remove the vehicle from the account for any reason, please contact your vehicle network carrier for more information. Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided by the vehicle network carrier, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability. 557 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan usage, is shared between Ford and the vehicle network carrier to provide the Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability, and may be used to enable a seamless transition from an old to new embedded modem and to confirm any updates are successfully delivered. Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) Note: : For your convenience data usage may be available for monitoring under Settings but may not reflect actual or current usage. The vehicle network carrier is responsible for providing information about your account. Please contact the vehicle network carrier for more information. Vehicle Note: : Ford may need to update operating system software on your vehicle, including security updates and bug fixes, to keep connected services current, like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to you. Door Keypad Code (If equipped) Tap a color once to active ambient lighting. This sets the color to the highest intensity. You can drag the colors up and down to increase or decrease the intensity. To switch ambient lighting off, press the active color once or drag the active color all the way down to zero intensity. Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these features. You can select the following features to update their settings. Select this button to add or erase a personal door keypad code. To add or erase a personal code, you first need to enter the five-digit factory set code. You can find this code on the owner's wallet card in the glove box or from your authorized dealer. Note: If you do not have an active vehicle hotspot data plan, open your web browser and go to a website using the HTTP protocol to be automatically redirected to the vehicle network carrier landing page where you can purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will not automatically redirect. Camera Settings To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Camera Settings Then select from the following: Enhanced Park Aids When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red, yellow and green highlights at the top of the image. Rear Camera Delay You can enable or disable this option using the slider. You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual. 558 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) shows you the ESN number for your system. You need this number for certain registrations such as Satellite Radio. Selecting this button on the settings menu Display To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Menu Item Action and Description Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Mode You can select: Auto Dim Auto The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside light level. Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing. Night The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier. Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen. Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions. Voice Control You can adjust the voice control settings by selecting the following options. Menu Item Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations. Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before making a call. Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands when the voice button is pressed. 559 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Valet Mode To enable valet mode, enter your chosen PIN. The system then asks to confirm your PIN by reentering it. The system then locks. Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN. To unlock the system, enter the same pin number. The system reconnects to your phone and all of your options are available again. When you select valet mode a pop up appears informing you that a four digit code must be entered to enable and disable valet mode. You can use any PIN you chose but you must use the same PIN to disable valet mode. The system asks you to input the code. SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. Note: If the system is locked and you cannot remember the PIN, please contact the Customer Relationship Center. To check your cell phone's compatibility, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. United States: 1-800-392-3673 Canada: 1-800-565-3673 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution There is background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC 3 performance. Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the Possible cell phone other person malfunction. but they cannot hear me. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. During a call, I cannot hear the The system may need to other person be restarted. and they cannot hear me. To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off. This is a cell phoneSYNC 3 is not dependent feature. able to download my phone- Possible cell phone book. malfunction. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone icon on the phone screen. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. 560 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to your cell phone's memory. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC 3. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again. Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone. Update your cell phone's firmware. Switch the auto download setting off. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Text messaging Possible cell phone is not working malfunction. on SYNC 3. iPhone Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. • • Go to your cell phone's Settings. Go to the Bluetooth Menu. 561 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution • • • Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your vehicle make and model to enter the next menu. Turn Show Notifications on. Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system to activate this settings update. Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3. Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application. Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone. Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Audible text messages do not work on my This is a cell phone limitacell phone. tion. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version. 562 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. I am having trouble connecting my device. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's Possible device malfunc- cable. tion. Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your vehicle's USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings. The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. SYNC 3 does not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold I start my temperatures. vehicle. This is a devicedependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have started the media player on your device. Bluetooth audio The device is not does not connected. stream. The device is in a bad state. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information. SYNC 3 does not recognize The file may be music that is on corrupted. my device. The song may have copyright protection that does not allow it to play. Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class. 563 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution The file format is not supported by SYNC 3. Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 517). The device needs to be re-indexed. Update media index. See Settings (page 546). The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3. When I connect my device, I To listen to Apple devices through USB, sometimes do This is a device limitation. select AirPlay from the devices Control not hear any Center, then select Dock Connector. sound. To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC. SYNC 3 does not display the The device or media song informaplayer is incompatible. tion, repeat, or shuffle buttons. Connect a compatible device or media player. Wi-Fi Issues Issue Failed connection. Possible cause Possible solution Password error. Verify password. Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal. Multiple Access points within range with the same SSID. Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address. 564 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Wi-Fi Issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Weak signal probably Disconnecting after successful due to distance from the hotspot, obstruction or connection. high interference. Position the vehicle close to the hotspot with the front of the vehicle facing the hotspot direction and remove obstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may cause interference. Poor signal seen There may be an by SYNC 3 obstruction between despite being SYNC 3 and the hotspot. near a hotspot. If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can open the windows in the direction of the hotspot if that is feasible. Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such as opening the garage door. A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try listed in the list as a hidden network. again. of available networks. 565 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Wi-Fi Issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not seen when currently provide a searching for hotspot. Wi-Fi networks from your phone or other devices. SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot. Software down- Poor signal strength, too far from the hotspot, load takes too hotspot is supporting long. multiple connections, slow Internet connection or other problems. Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped hotspot where the environment is more predictable. SYNC 3 seems to connect with a hotspot and the signal strength is excellent but the software is not being updated. It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if no new software. The the hotspot requires a subscription, you connected hotspot may may contact the service provider. be a managed one and it requires either a subscription or agreeing to the terms and conditions. 566 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You did not connect an Applink Compatible phone to SYNC 3. Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable. My phone is connected, but I still cannot find any apps. AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on your mobile device. Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. My phone is connected, my app(s) are running, but I still cannot find any apps. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app. If the app does not have that option, select the phone's Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.' properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3. SYNC 3, over ignition cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu. AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find any applications. 567 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth issue on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you did not switch Bluetooth off. Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I You may need to reset the USB connection to restarted the SYNC 3. app but I still cannot find it on SYNC 3. Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. I can only see some of the AppLink apps running on my phone listed in the SYNC 3 Mobile Apps Menu. Some Android devices have a limited number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to connect. If you have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of available Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. 568 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may be using the SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there. Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command. You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section. Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device. For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain". You may not be saying SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it not understand appears on your device. the name of a song or artist. SYNC 3 does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call. Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N". The song or artist name may have some special characters that are not being recognized by SYNC 3. Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom". The contact name may contain special characters. Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. 569 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive. You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC 3. The system generates voice prompts and SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt ation of some technology. words may not be accurate for my language. Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting. SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists. SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice. SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). 570 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution Personal Profiles have not been set up. An invalid profile name was entered. I cannot create a profile. A memory button was not selected when prompted. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while creating a profile. Personal Profiles is turned off. The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted. The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite was declined. I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while linking a keyfob. The old linking method is used. The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles. My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than expected. Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile. A Personal Profile has not been created. Personal Profiles is turned off. My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active. The memory button being used is not linked to a profile. 571 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile. The wrong keyfob is being used. A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked keyfob. The Personal Profile was deleted. My preset positions recall but my profile does not. My profile recalls but my preset positions do not. I lost a keyfob. I lost all profiles. Personal Profiles is turned off. The vehicle is in motion. The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active profile. Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer. Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one. Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement. 572 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped) General Issue The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC 3 language (phone, USB, Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts). Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the the currently selected language for the instru- current active language. ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages. display. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). SYNC 3 System Reset The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system. For additional assistance with SYNC 3 troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. 573 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: • • Interior style • • • • • Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Ford Motor Company will warrant your vehicle through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Exterior style • • • • • • Ambient lighting. Cargo organizers. Custom seat covers*. Floor liners. Floor mats. Lifestyle Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through an authorized dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. • • Step bars. Wheel well liners. Commercial graphics*. Commercial LED warning strobe lights*. Hood deflectors. Exhaust tip. Running boards. Side window deflectors*. Splash guards. Stainless-steel wheel covers*. Ash cup/smoker's package. Bed cargo net, tie down plates and cleats. Bed extender. Bedliners and bedmats. Bed ramps. Hitches. Racks and carriers*. Sportliner cargo liner*. Tonneau/bed cover*. Tow hooks. Towing accessories. Trailer back-up camera. Trailer brake control. Truck bed camping tent*. Trailer TPMS. Peace of mind • • • • • • • • 574 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Back-up alarm*. Bed hooks*. Bumper and hitch-mounted parking sensors*. Ford Telematics. Keyless entry keypad. Protective seat covers*. Remote start and alarms. Roadside assistance kits*. Accessories • • • • • Cruise control. Tool or Cargo boxes*. Vehicle security system. Wheel locks. Wheel well liners. • *The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details, and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. • An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems. Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use. If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. AUXILIARY SWITCHES(IfEquipped) For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems equipped with radio transmitters, for example, two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations, and should be installed by an authorized dealer. 575 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Accessories • • An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems. Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use. If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. When switched on, the auxiliary switches provide electrical battery power for a variety of personal or commercial uses. Switches 1 through 4 provide 25 amps. Switches 5 and 6 provide 40 amps. The relay box for the auxiliary switches is in the rear of the engine compartment, near the back wall. See your authorized dealer for service. The relays are coded as shown: E220728 The auxiliary switch option package provides six switches mounted in the overhead console. These switches operate when the vehicle is running or from battery power, depending on the switchable fuse AUXF4's location in the upfitter relay box. We recommend, however, that the engine remain running to maintain battery charge when using the auxiliary switches for extended periods of time or higher current draws. Note: When your vehicle has a diesel engine, use the auxiliary switches only when the engine is running. The glow plugs also drain battery power when the ignition key is in the on position. Using the auxiliary switches, even for limited amounts of time, can cause your battery to drain quickly and prevent your vehicle from restarting. E220729 576 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Accessories Each switch includes a blunt-cut, sealed wire. The wires are under the instrument panel on the right-hand side of the passenger footwell. E220730 The power leads are coded as shown: Switch Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Amp Rating AUX 1 CB117A Brown with green trace 25A AUX 2 CB114A Violet with orange trace 25A AUX 3 CB116A Blue with green trace 25A 577 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Accessories Switch Circuit Number Wire Color Fuse Amp Rating AUX 4 CB113A Gray with brown trace 25A AUX 5 CB115A Brown with blue trace 40A AUX 6 CB118A Gray with orange trace 40A Upfitter Interface Module (If Equipped) The Upfitter Interface Module (UIM) is an electronic control module that operates equipment (such as lift buckets, cranes, motors, salt spreaders and snow plows) with external relays. If you replace the module, it will require additional programming by the upfitter. Obtain this data directly from the upfitter company. The upfitter contact information is in the vehicle door opening. For more information on the Upfitter Interface Module and the auxiliary switches, contact your upfitter. 578 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Ford Protect PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership. • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts. Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only) Rental Car Reimbursement Ford Protect extended service plan means peace of mind. It’s the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford Protect extended service plans! 1st day Rental Benefit If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the day. Extended Rental Benefits Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. One trip to the Service Center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With Ford Protect extended service plan you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components • There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • • 1. • PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it’s probably easier to list what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation. Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Which should give you and your potential buyer a little more peace of mind. Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. 579 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Ford Protect Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY) Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as: Covered maintenance includes: • Windshield wiper blades. • Spark plugs. • The clutch disc (if equipped). • Brake pads and linings. • Shock absorbers. • Struts. • Engine Belts. • Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. • Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped). • Cabin air filter replacement every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric vehicles only). • • • • Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Protect extended service plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information; visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you. Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 580 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km). 581 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 337). Additives and Chemicals This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. 582 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Check Every Month Air filter restriction gauge. Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display. Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris. Check Every Six Months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. 583 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point Inspection Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Tires including the spare for wear and 1 Fluid levels ; fill if necessary proper pressure 1 2 For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer 2 If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 584 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Gasoline Engine Normal Maintenance Intervals 7,500 mi (12,000 km)or Six Months Whichever Comes First Change engine oil and filter. 1 Rotate tires , inspect tire wear and measure tread depth. Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Perform multi-point inspection recommended. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. 15,000 mi (24,000 km)or 12 Months Whichever Comes First Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake. Inspect engine coolant concentration, freeze-point protection, level and hoses. Inspect exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Four-wheel drive vehicles. Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Other Maintenance Items Every 15,000 mi (24,000 km) Replace cabin air filter. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace engine air filter. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if nonsealed bearings are used. Every 97,000 mi (156,000 km) Replace spark plugs. Every 105,000 mi (168,000 km) Change engine coolant. 1 585 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Other Maintenance Items Inspect accessory drive belt or belts. 2 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on 6-speed transmission. Consult dealer for requirements. Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km) Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km). Replace front wheel bearings and seals if non-sealed bearings are used. Change axle(s) fluid. See exceptions. Change transfer case fluid if equipped. 1 Initial replacement at six years or 105,000 mi (168,000 km), then every three years or 45,000 mi (72,000 km). 2 If not replaced, inspect the belt or belts every 15,000 mi (24,000 km). This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. Diesel Engine Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor Your vehicle has an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how you use your vehicle. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil Miles (km) Vehicle Use and Example Normal 7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km) 5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km) Normal commuting with highway driving. No, or moderate, load or towing. Flat to moderately hilly roads. No extended idling. Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing. Mountainous or off-road conditions. 586 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance When to Expect the Message Prompting You to Change Your Oil Miles (km) Vehicle Use and Example Extended idling, 200-300 hours. Extended hot or cold operation. Extreme 2,500–5,000 mi (4,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing. Extreme hot or cold operation. Use of high sulfur diesel fuel. Note: Use the appropriate special operating condition for maintenance information when using high sulfur diesel fuels, operating your vehicle off-road or in dusty conditions, such as unpaved roads. Note: For every hour that your vehicle idles, it has accumulated the equivalent of approximately 25 mi (40 km). Normal Maintenance Intervals 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display Change the engine oil and filter. 2 Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display. Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. 3 Rotate the tires , inspect the tires for wear and measure tread depth. Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant concentration freeze-point protection, level and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. 587 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display Inspect the front axle and U-joints. Lubricate any grease fittings. Four-wheel drive vehicles. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate any grease fittings. 1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. 3 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. 1 Other maintenance items Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the cabin air filter. Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters. Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant concentration freeze-point protection, additive corrosion inhibitor strength, coolant level, and hoses. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) Replace the air inlet foam filter. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace the front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if using non-sealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles. At 90,000 mi (144,000 km) Inspect the accessory drive belt or belts.2 Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Change the crankcase ventilation filter element if equipped. Dual rear wheel and incomplete chassis configurations only. 3 Change the engine and secondary cooling system coolant. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Consult dealer for requirements. Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km) Replace the accessory drive belt or belts if not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Replace the front wheel bearings and seals if using nonsealed bearings. Two-wheel drive vehicles. 588 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance 1 Other maintenance items Change axle(s) fluid. See exceptions. Change transfer case fluid, if equipped. 1 You can perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last oil change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 50 fl oz (1.4 L) for the engine and 20 fl oz (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe, permanent engine damage. 2 Perform follow-up inspections every 15,000 mi (24,000 km) after the initial inspection. Replace the belt or belts at 150,000 mi (240,000 km). 3 Initial replacement is at six years or 105,000 mi (168,000 km), then every three years or 45,000 mi (72,000 km). SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Gasoline Engine If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease fittings. See axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 589 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier 1 Rotate tires , inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or six months. Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease fittings. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles). Replace spark plugs. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use (Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect brake system. Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped with grease fittings. 1 Rotate tires , inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease or six months fittings. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or six months or 200 engine hours. 590 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use (Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery) Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace spark plugs. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace engine air filter. Replace cabin air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 1 Rotate tires , inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or six months Inspect and lubricate U-joints if equipped with grease fittings. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. Off-road operation Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints, Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Replace engine air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or six months Replace cabin air filter. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 591 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Off-road operation 1 Rotate tires , inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if non-sealed bearings are used. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only) Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. Diesel Engine If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km) or six months, filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles) 592 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) or 1200 engine concentration (freeze-point protection) and additive hours (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 50 fl oz (1.4 L) for the engine and 20 fl oz (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe, permanent engine damage. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. Frequent or Extended Idling (Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving) or Frequent Low-speed Operation if your Vehicle is Used for Stationary Operation As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant (48,000 km) or 1200 engine concentration (freeze-point protection) and additive hours (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 50 fl oz (1.4 L) for the engine and 20 fl oz (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe, permanent engine damage. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. 593 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or Long Rush-hour Traffic As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant (48,000 km) or 1200 engine concentration (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if hours necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 50 fl oz (1.4 L) for the engine and 20 fl oz (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe, permanent engine damage. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight for Vehicle Operation) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles) 594 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight for Vehicle Operation) Inspect the engine and secondary cooling system coolant Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) or 1200 engine concentration (freeze-point protection) and additive hours (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: When adding coolant additive, do not exceed the specified maximum of 48 fluid ounces (1.4 liters) for the engine and 16 fluid ounces (473 ml) for the secondary cooling system. Operating the engine with excessive coolant additive may cause overheating which could lead to severe, permanent engine damage. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles) Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km) Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure tread depth. Inspect the brake system pads and rotors. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods. Lubricate any grease fittings. 595 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km), Change the engine oil and filter.2 six months or 300 engine hours Inspect and lubricate the U-joints. Every 15,000 mi (24,000 km), 6 months or 600 engine hours Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the air inlet foam filter. Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles) 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. Off-road Operation As required Inspect functional holes in each leg of the twin exhaust tips and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right rear tire to make sure they are clean and clear of debris or foreign materials. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter of your owner’s manual for more information. Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods. Lubricate any grease fittings. Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km), Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure six months or 300 engine tread depth. hours Inspect the brake system pads and rotors. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.2 or 300 engine hours Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the air inlet foam filter. Replace the wheel bearing grease and grease seals if using non-sealed bearings. (Two-wheel drive vehicles). 596 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Off-road Operation Every 50,000 mi (80,000 km) Change the rear axle fluid (Dana rear axles only - some F350s; all F-450s and F-550s). Change the transfer case fluid. (Four-wheel drive vehicles) Inspect the front axle fluid. (Four-wheel drive vehicles) 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 15,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (24,000 km), six months or filters. 300 engine hours Using Fuel Other Than Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel Fuel - Vehicles Operated Where Ultra-low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is not Required or Available Every 2,500 mi (4,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or three months (if using high sulfur fuel with more than 500 ppm sulfur) Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter. or six months (if using high sulfur fuel with fewer than 500 ppm sulfur) wide-open throttle for long periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axle fluid every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) if the rear axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid. This interval can be waived and the 150,000 mi (240,000 km) service interval can continue if the rear axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford Exceptions Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance Axle(s) and transfer case (4X4 only) fluid changes or level checks are not required unless a leak is suspected or the assembly has been submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures above 70°F (21°C) or at 597 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number XY-75W140-QL, or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear axles. See Capacities and Specifications (page 420). If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 2,000 mi (3,000 km). Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter Replacement The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter. Additional Axle Maintenance for Dual Rear Wheels Change rear axle fluid every 250,000 mi (400,000 km) under normal driving conditions on all commercial applications. When operating your vehicle at or near maximum gross vehicle weights, change the rear axle fluid every 60,000 mi (96,000 km). In addition, follow this 60,000 mi (96,000 km) schedule when operating your vehicle under the special operating conditions where noted. Diesel Particulate Filter Over time, a slight amount of ash builds up in the diesel particulate filter, which is not removed during the regeneration process. The filter may need to be replaced with a new or remanufactured part at approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km). Actual mileage varies depending on engine and vehicle operating conditions. California Fuel Filter Replacement If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. In this case, the engine control system sets a service light (wrench icon) to inform you to bring your vehicle to the dealer for service. If there are any issues with the oxidation catalyst or particulate filter system, a service light (wrench or engine icon) sets by the engine control system to inform you to bring your vehicle into a dealer for service. Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi (5,000 km). 598 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 599 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 600 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 601 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 602 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 603 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 604 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 605 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 606 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 607 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Scheduled Maintenance Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Repair Order #: Dealer stamp Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 608 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNINGS Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following table. We do not provide special provisions or conditions for installations or use. Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags. Car E239120 609 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Van E239122 Truck E239121 610 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 1-30 50 1 50-54 50 2, 3 68-88 50 2, 3 142-176 50 2, 3 380-512 50 2, 3 806-870 10 2, 3 Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Check all electrical equipment: • With the ignition ON. • With the engine running. • During a road test at various speeds. • VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. • 611 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. Appendices IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. Description of Other Rights and Limitations • Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR • • 612 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional • • 613 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. Appendices UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. 614 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices • SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: • Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. • General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • • • 615 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Appendices Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. Disclaimer of Warranty YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL 616 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 617 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim. (g) Arbitration fees and incentives. • (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator • • 618 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all Appendices 1. Safe and Lawful Use filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (I) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 619 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices 2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 3. Software License • ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. 4. Disclaimers • 3.1 License Limitations • (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) 620 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others Appendices • • is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • 5. Limitation of Liability • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY 621 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit Appendices to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 7. Assignment 8.3 • By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 8.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 622 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices 8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:: The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved Terms and Conditions 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 623 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 624 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. I. US/Canada Territory A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices: Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: “HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.” “©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.” 625 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.” B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. 3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan: b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data. The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, 626 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data. II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” III. Latin America Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Territory Notice Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011” “source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®” Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico 4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail. “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” IV. Middle East Territory 627 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country Notice Jordan “© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan Data. V. Europe Territory A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe 1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights. 2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Transports.” B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE’s database for the country of Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services. B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic 628 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden. Austria Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen” “© EuroGeographics” France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD TOPO ®” Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen” Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010” C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement. D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country(ies) Notice Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.” Hungary “Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.” Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.” Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority” Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal” 629 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG” Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.” Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: “Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.” Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie. E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries. AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics Disclosure END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR VI. Australia Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). 630 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING CARRIER. (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE DEVICE. (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES VII. China Territory THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT GUARANTEE ANY END USER UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER Personal Use Only You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) 631 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices rigCustomer Remedies view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. Restrictions Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions. No Other Warranty: EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limited Warranty NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues. Limited Liability: TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR 632 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Governing Law. FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. Export Control You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. IP Protection Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Entire Agreement This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers 633 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, 634 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Taiwan Territory IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors: Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization. Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment. Radio Frequency Statement FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND CONDITIONS By activating, using and/or accessing the SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult: WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 1. Acceptance 635 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at: 5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel We will use reasonable endeavours to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA Products and/or Services at any time. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services. Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. 6. Limitation of Liability Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA Products and/or Services. 3. Appropriate Use SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself. 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving You, and other authorised drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so. 7. Please Note Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. 636 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E207818 European Union EU TYPE APPROVALS E253824 Ghana RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) E253823 Jordan E207816 Argentina E253822 Malaysia E253812 E197509 Brazil E253813 637 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices Mexico E253816 Russia E197811 Moldova E197844 Serbia E207821 Morocco E253820 Singapore E253817 Oman E198002 South Africa E198001 Philippines E253819 South Korea 638 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices RF Certification Logos for Mid Range Radar E203679 Taiwan E269659 Argentina E253818 Ukraine E269662 Ghana E207817 United Arab Emirates E269660 Jordan 639 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices RF Certification Logos for Passive Anti-Theft System E269661 Morocco E269675 Brazil E269664 South Africa E269674 Ghana E269663 United Arab Emirates E269666 Jordan 640 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices E269673 E269672 Malaysia Serbia E269670 E269676 Morocco Singapore E269669 E269667 Pakistan South Africa 641 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices RF Certification Logos for Radio Transceiver Module E269671 Ukraine E269683 Morocco E269668 United Arab Emirates E269684 Pakistan E269677 Vietnam E269681 Serbia 642 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices E269685 E269697 South Africa Malaysia E269682 E269696 Ukraine South Africa RF Certification Logos for Blind Spot Information System E269694 United Arab Emirates E269695 Ghana 643 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Appendices E269693 United Arab Emirates 644 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index 3 Airbag Disposal...............................................55 Air Conditioning See: Climate Control.........................................146 360 Degree Camera...................................239 Air Filter Advanced Camera Views...............................239 Auxiliary Camera................................................242 Camera Views.....................................................239 Center High-Mount Stop Lamp Camera..............................................................241 Front Camera......................................................240 Keep Out Zone...................................................240 Side Camera.........................................................241 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/ 6.8L....................................................................362 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L Diesel.................................................................363 Alarm See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................78 Ambient Lighting............................................97 Anti-Theft Alarm............................................78 4 Arming the Alarm.................................................79 Disarming the Alarm...........................................79 Using the System.................................................79 4WD Appendices...................................................609 Apps.................................................................543 See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................214 A ..................................................................................543 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................545 At a Glance.........................................................17 Audible Warnings and Indicators.............112 A/C See: Climate Control.........................................146 Headlamps On Warning Chime......................112 Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................112 Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................112 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS See: Brakes...........................................................225 Audio Control...................................................83 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................227 Media........................................................................84 Seek, Next or Previous.......................................84 Accessories.....................................................574 Audio System................................................445 Exterior style........................................................574 Interior style..........................................................574 Lifestyle..................................................................574 Peace of mind.....................................................574 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC.............................................................448 General Information.........................................445 Menu Structure..................................................450 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Touchscreen Display...............................453 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/ FM..................................................................446 Autolamps........................................................90 Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation............................................12 ACC See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............244 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........................................................90 Adjusting the Headlamps.........................355 Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................357 Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................355 Automatic Climate Control.......................147 Automatic High Beam Control..................92 Adjusting the Pedals....................................86 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column............................................................82 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column............................................................82 Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................93 Switching the System On and Off.................92 Automatic Transmission..........................208 Brake-Shift Interlock...........................................211 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow...................................................................212 End of Travel Position.........................................83 645 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index C Understanding the Shift Positions of Your Automatic Transmission...........................208 Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission.........................210 Cabin Air Filter................................................152 California Proposition 65.............................12 Capacities and Specifications 6.2L.................................................................427 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check............................................................346 Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid...................................................................346 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates............................................................431 Specifications.....................................................428 Autowipers........................................................87 Auxiliary Power Points................................170 Capacities and Specifications - 6.7L Diesel.............................................................432 110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power Outlet.................................................................170 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................170 Locations...............................................................170 Engine Oil Specifications...............................438 Specifications.....................................................434 Capacities and Specifications 6.8L................................................................439 Auxiliary Switches........................................575 Upfitter Interface Module...............................578 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................443 Specifications.....................................................440 B Capacities and Specifications...............420 Cargo Lamps....................................................97 Car Wash Battery See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................353 Bed Extender....................................................74 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................370 Grocery mode........................................................75 Tailgate mode........................................................74 Catalytic Converter......................................196 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................197 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing....................................................197 Bed Ramps....................................................268 Installing the Ramp Holder............................270 Stowing the Bed Ramp...................................270 Using the Bed Ramp........................................269 Center Console...............................................172 Changing a Bulb...........................................357 Blind Spot Information System..............252 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........328 Cargo Lamp and Central High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................359 Fog Lamp Bulbs.................................................358 Front Park and Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs..................................................................357 Headlamp Bulbs.................................................357 License Plate Lamp Bulb...............................360 Rear Lamps, Brake Lamps, Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp Bulbs.................................................................358 Booster Seats..................................................32 Changing a Fuse..........................................326 Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow.....................................................................254 Switching the System Off and On..............256 System Errors......................................................256 Using the System...............................................253 BLIS See: Blind Spot Information System..........252 Bonnet Lock Types of Booster Seats......................................32 Fuses......................................................................326 Brake Fluid Check........................................349 Brakes...............................................................225 Changing a Road Wheel..........................408 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information....................................................408 Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.................................................................409 Removing the Spare Tire (With Spare Tire Carrier Only)...................................................409 Tire Change Procedure....................................410 General Information..........................................225 Breaking-In....................................................298 Bulb Specification Chart..........................360 646 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.........................375 Cleaning the Interior....................................373 Cleaning the Wheels...................................377 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades............................................................373 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65 Climate.............................................................527 Climate Control.............................................146 Climate Controlled Seats..........................163 Changing the 12V Battery.........................353 Battery Management System......................354 Changing the Crankcase Vent Filter Element........................................................336 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.2L/ 6.8L................................................................362 Changing the Engine Air Filter - 6.7L Diesel.............................................................363 Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................364 Changing the Engine-Mounted and Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Fuel Filters - 6.7L Diesel...................................365 Cooled Seats........................................................164 Heated Seats........................................................163 Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module Filter...................................................................365 Engine-mounted Fuel Filter..........................368 Collision Warning System.........................261 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter...............................................................335 See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L.....338 See: Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel.................................................................342 Principle Of Operation......................................261 Coolant Check Engine lubrication for severe service operation..........................................................336 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54 Creating a MyKey...........................................64 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................355 Checking MyKey System Status...............65 Programming or Changing Configurable Settings...............................................................64 MyKey Distance....................................................65 Number of Admin Keys......................................65 Number of MyKeys..............................................65 Cross Traffic Alert.........................................257 General Information.............................................19 False Alerts..........................................................259 Switching the System Off and On..............259 System Errors......................................................259 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts.................................................................258 System Limitations...........................................259 Using the System...............................................257 Child Safety Locks.........................................35 Cruise Control.................................................84 Checking the Wiper Blades......................355 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance.................................................44 Child Restraint Positioning.........................34 Child Safety.......................................................19 Left-Hand Side.....................................................36 Right-Hand Side...................................................36 Principle of Operation......................................243 Cruise control Cleaning Leather Seats..............................375 See: Using Cruise Control...............................243 With King Ranch Edition.................................376 Without King Ranch Edition...........................375 Customer Assistance..................................310 D Cleaning Products.......................................370 Materials...............................................................370 Cleaning the Engine....................................372 Cleaning the Exhaust - 6.7L Diesel........372 Cleaning the Exterior..................................370 Data Recording................................................10 Cleaning the Headlamps.................................371 Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................371 Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................371 Stripes or Graphics.............................................371 Underbody.............................................................371 Under Hood...........................................................371 Daytime Running Lamps..............................91 Event Data Recording..........................................10 Service Data Recording......................................10 Type One - Conventional (Non-Configurable)........................................91 Type Two - Configurable....................................91 Diesel Particulate Filter.............................202 Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel Particulate Filter System...........................203 647 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Engine Coolant Check - 6.7L Diesel.............................................................342 Regeneration.......................................................202 Digital Radio..................................................454 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting............................................455 Adding Coolant...................................................342 Checking Coolant Corrosion Inhibitor Additive Strength .........................................345 Coolant Change.................................................346 Engine and Secondary Cooling System Refill Procedure.............................................344 Engine-driven Cooling Fan (Fan Clutch)..............................................................346 Recycled Coolant..............................................344 Severe Climates.................................................344 Direction Indicators.......................................93 Doors and Locks.............................................67 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap - 6.7L Diesel..............................................................351 Draining the Diesel Fuel Conditioner Module...............................................................351 Filter Location......................................................351 Driver and Passenger Airbags....................47 Children and Airbags...........................................52 Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........47 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment.........................................................51 Engine Emission Control............................195 Engine Idle Shutdown.................................183 Engine Immobilizer Driving Aids....................................................250 Driving Hints..................................................298 Driving Through Water..............................299 DRL Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L..................333 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76 Adding Engine Oil...............................................333 Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel................334 Adding Engine Oil..............................................335 Engine lubrication for severe service operation .........................................................335 See: Daytime Running Lamps..........................91 E Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.2L/6.8L...............333 Engine Oil Dipstick - 6.7L Diesel.............333 Engine Specifications - 6.2L...................420 Economical Driving.....................................298 Electromagnetic Compatibility.............609 Electronic Locking Differential................223 Drivebelt Routing...............................................420 Engine Specifications - 6.7L Diesel............................................................420 Activating the Electronic Locking Differential.......................................................223 ..................................................................................420 Drivebelt Routing................................................421 Emission Law.................................................195 Engine Specifications - 6.8L.....................421 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........196 Tampering With a Noise Control System...............................................................195 Drivebelt Routing...............................................422 Entertainment................................................517 AM/FM Radio.......................................................518 Apps.......................................................................526 Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................525 CD (If equipped)................................................524 HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..........................................................521 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated).........................................................519 Sources...................................................................518 Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information................................526 USB Ports.............................................................526 End User License Agreement...................611 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ...................................611 Engine Block Heater....................................183 Using the Engine Block Heater......................184 Engine Coolant Check - 6.2L/6.8L........338 Adding Coolant..................................................338 Engine Coolant Temperature Management...................................................341 Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................340 Recycled Coolant...............................................339 Severe Climates.................................................340 Environment.....................................................16 Essential Towing Checks..........................286 Before Towing a Trailer....................................293 648 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Ford Protect...................................................579 Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View Camera System.............................................287 Hitches..................................................................288 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.............290 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)........................................294 Safety Chains......................................................290 Trailer Brakes......................................................290 Trailer Lamps.......................................................293 Trailer Towing Connector...............................286 When Towing a Trailer.....................................294 Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY)..........................................580 Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only)..................................................................579 Four-Wheel Drive..........................................214 Front Fog Lamps............................................93 Front Seat Armrest......................................164 ...................................................................................164 Fuel and Refueling.......................................185 Fuel Consumption........................................193 Event Data Recording Fuel Economy......................................................194 Fuel Filter - 6.2L/6.8L.................................352 Fuel Quality - Diesel.....................................187 See: Data Recording............................................10 Export Unique Options.................................15 Exterior Mirrors................................................99 Biodiesel................................................................188 Diesel Fuel Additives.........................................189 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required ..........187 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin Islands And Other Locales) ......................187 Blind Spot Information System.....................101 Clearance Lamps ...............................................101 Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................101 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................99 Heated Exterior Mirrors ....................................101 Memory Mirrors ...................................................101 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................99 PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Mirrors...............................................................100 Puddle Lamps......................................................101 Spot Lamps...........................................................101 Telescoping Mirrors...........................................100 Trailer Towing Camera System......................101 Fuel Quality - E85........................................186 Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles.............................................................186 Switching Between E85 and Gasoline.............................................................187 F Fuel Quality - Gasoline..............................189 Choosing the Right Fuel..................................189 Fastening the Seatbelts..............................38 Fuel Shutoff..................................................304 Fuses..................................................................317 Fuse Specification Chart............................317 Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................39 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................41 Seatbelt Locking Modes...................................40 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................39 Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat on Super Cab and Crew Cab)..........................................................38 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........323 Power Distribution Box.....................................317 G Flat Tire Garage Door Opener See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........166 Floor Mats......................................................299 Fog Lamps - Front Gauges.............................................................105 DEF Gauge............................................................108 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge...........107 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................106 Fuel Gauge............................................................107 Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge................................................................108 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................93 Foot Pedals See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................86 Ford Credit.........................................................12 US Only......................................................................12 649 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate..........................................................149 Turbo Boost Gauge...........................................108 Type 1 and 2..........................................................105 Type 3.....................................................................106 Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather..............................................................151 General Hints.......................................................149 Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................151 Quickly Heating the Interior............................150 Recommended Settings for Cooling............151 Recommended Settings for Heating..........150 Gearbox See: Transmission.............................................208 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................56 Intelligent Access.................................................56 General Maintenance Information........581 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................227 Home Screen................................................509 Hood Lock Multi-Point Inspection.....................................583 Owner Checks and Services..........................582 Protecting Your Investment............................581 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................581 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?......................................................581 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........328 I Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada..........................................................313 Getting the Services You Need...............310 Ignition Switch................................................175 In California (U.S. Only)...............................311 Information Display Control......................85 Information Displays....................................113 Away From Home..............................................310 Global Opening..............................................99 Opening the Windows.......................................99 General Information...........................................113 H Information Messages................................129 4WD.........................................................................145 Active Park............................................................129 Adaptive Cruise Control...................................130 Adaptive Steering...............................................130 AdvanceTrac and Traction Control...............131 Airbag.......................................................................131 Alarm and Security..............................................131 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................132 Battery and Charging System........................132 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System....................................................133 Collision Warning System...............................134 Diesel Messages..................................................134 Doors and Locks.................................................136 Driver Alert.............................................................137 Drivetrain................................................................137 Engine......................................................................137 Fuel..........................................................................138 Keys and Intelligent Access............................138 Lane Keeping System.......................................139 Maintenance........................................................139 MyKey.....................................................................140 Off Road................................................................140 Park Aid...................................................................141 Park Brake..............................................................141 Handbrake See: Parking Brake.............................................227 Hazard Flashers...........................................304 HDC See: Using Hill Descent Control....................233 Headlamp Adjusting See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................355 Headrest See: Head Restraints.........................................154 Head Restraints............................................154 Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................155 Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................152 Heated Rear Window..................................152 Heated Seats..................................................162 Rear Heated Seats.............................................163 Heated Steering Wheel...............................85 Heating See: Climate Control.........................................146 Hill Start Assist..............................................227 Switching the System On and Off..............228 Using Hill Start Assist.......................................228 650 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Removing the Jumper Cables......................306 Power Steering....................................................142 Remote Start........................................................142 Seats........................................................................142 Starting System ..................................................143 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................143 Trailer.......................................................................143 K Keyless Entry....................................................70 SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD...............................................................70 Installing Child Restraints...........................20 Keyless Starting.............................................176 Child Seats..............................................................20 Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats....................................................................29 Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Regular Cab)...................................................30 Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew Cab and Super Cab)........................................31 Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) ....................................................28 Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat Outboard Positions)......................................25 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab).......................................................................21 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab)......................................................................23 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)............................................27 Using Tether Straps.............................................29 Ignition Modes......................................................176 Keys and Remote Controls.........................56 L Lane Keeping System................................250 Switching the System On and Off..............250 System Display....................................................251 System Settings.................................................250 Troubleshooting..................................................251 Lighting Control..............................................89 Headlamp Flasher...............................................90 Headlamp High Beam.......................................89 Lighting..............................................................89 General Information...........................................89 Limited Slip Differential.............................223 Load Carrying................................................264 Load Limit......................................................264 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles............................................................268 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer................................................................264 Instrument Cluster.......................................105 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................90 Locking and Unlocking.................................67 Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps......................91 Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps................91 Activating Intelligent Access............................67 Autolock..................................................................69 Battery Saver.........................................................70 Illuminated Entry..................................................69 Power Door Locks.................................................67 Remote Control.....................................................67 Smart Unlock........................................................68 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys......................................................................68 Instrument Panel Overview.........................17 Interior Lamps.................................................94 Front Interior Lamps...........................................94 Rear Interior Lamps............................................96 Interior Mirror...................................................101 Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................102 Manual Dimming Mirror....................................101 Introduction.........................................................7 Lug Nuts J See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 M Jump Starting the Vehicle........................305 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................305 Jump Starting.....................................................306 Preparing Your Vehicle....................................305 Maintenance.................................................328 General Information.........................................328 651 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Oil Check Manual Climate Control............................146 Manual Seats.................................................156 See: Engine Oil Check - 6.2L/6.8L...............333 See: Engine Oil Check - 6.7L Diesel............334 Manual Lumbar ..................................................157 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward..............................................................157 Recline Adjustment............................................157 Opening and Closing the Hood..............328 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature.......................................................314 Memory Function.........................................159 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........315 Easy Entry and Exit Feature...........................160 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob ..............................................................................160 Recalling a Preset Position.............................160 Saving a Preset Position..................................160 Overhead Console........................................172 P Parking Aids...................................................235 Principle of Operation......................................235 Parking Brake.................................................227 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................76 Message Center See: Information Displays.................................113 Mirrors SecuriLock®...........................................................76 PATS See: Windows and Mirrors...............................98 Mobile Communications Equipment......14 Moonroof.........................................................103 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................76 Pedals................................................................86 Perchlorate.........................................................12 Phone...............................................................529 Bounce-Back.......................................................104 Opening and Closing the Moonroof............103 Motorcraft Parts - 6.2L..............................422 Motorcraft Parts - 6.7L Diesel.................423 Motorcraft Parts - 6.8L..............................424 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................65 MyKey™.............................................................63 During a Phone Call..........................................533 Making Calls.........................................................532 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time...................................................................529 Phone Menu........................................................530 Receiving Calls....................................................533 Smartphone Connectivity..............................534 Text Messaging...................................................534 Principle of Operation........................................63 N Post-Crash Alert System..........................307 Power Door Locks Navigation......................................................535 cityseeker..............................................................542 Destination Mode...............................................537 Map Mode............................................................536 Navigation Map Updates................................543 Navigation Menu...............................................540 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................543 SYNC AppLink....................................................542 Waypoints.............................................................541 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................67 Power Running Boards................................80 Power Seats....................................................157 Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion ...............................................................158 Power Lumbar.....................................................158 Power Steering Fluid Check....................350 Power Take-Off.............................................213 Power Windows.............................................98 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........584 Diesel Engine......................................................586 Gasoline Engine.................................................585 Accessory Delay...................................................99 Bounce-Back.........................................................98 One-Touch Up or Down....................................98 Window Lock.........................................................99 O Protecting the Environment........................16 Puncture Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................337 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 652 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index R Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)...............................................................315 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)...............................................................315 Roadside Assistance..................................303 Rear Axle.........................................................223 Rear Parking Aid...........................................235 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................236 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance.......................................................304 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage................304 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance.......................................................304 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance...................................303 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance...................................303 Rear Seat Armrest........................................165 Rear Seats........................................................161 Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ...............161 Rear Under Seat Storage..................................161 Returning the Seat to the Seating Position...............................................................161 Rear View Camera.......................................236 Camera Guidelines............................................237 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................238 Rear Camera Delay...........................................238 Using the Rear View Camera System.........237 Roadside Emergencies..............................303 Running-In Rear View Camera See: Rear View Camera...................................236 See: Breaking-In.................................................298 Recommended Towing Weights...........282 Running Out of Fuel....................................190 Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle..............................285 S Refueling - Diesel..........................................191 Dual Fuel Tanks...................................................193 Fueling Tips...........................................................192 Refueling................................................................192 Safety Canopy™.............................................53 Safety Precautions......................................185 Satellite Radio..............................................456 Refueling - Gasoline....................................190 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN).................................................................457 Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............457 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................457 Troubleshooting.................................................458 Fuel Filler Cap.......................................................191 Remote Control..............................................56 Car Finder.................................................................61 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................56 Intelligent Access Key.........................................57 Memory Feature...................................................60 Remote Start..........................................................61 Replacing the Battery.........................................58 Sounding the Panic Alarm.................................61 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........598 Scheduled Maintenance...........................581 Seatbelt Extension........................................45 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................42 Seatbelt Reminder........................................43 Belt-Minder™........................................................43 Remote Start..................................................152 Automatic Settings............................................152 Seatbelts............................................................37 Removing the Tailgate..................................72 Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............377 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................12 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime...............................................................42 Principle of Operation.........................................37 Conditions of operation.....................................43 Collision Repairs....................................................13 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs..................................................................13 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................13 Seats.................................................................154 Security..............................................................76 Selective Catalytic Reductant System Diesel.............................................................198 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control.............................................................62 Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction System..............................................................202 653 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and Information......................................................201 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level..............................198 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages and Vehicle Operations.............................200 Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank..........198 Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power Source...................................................................14 Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow............14 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................589 Diesel Engine.......................................................592 Exceptions............................................................597 Gasoline Engine.................................................589 Settings...........................................................546 911 Assist................................................................551 Ambient Lighting...............................................558 Bluetooth.............................................................548 Clock......................................................................548 Display...................................................................559 General..................................................................556 Media Player........................................................547 Mobile Apps.........................................................554 Navigation............................................................552 Phone....................................................................548 Radio.......................................................................551 Sound....................................................................546 Valet Mode..........................................................560 Vehicle...................................................................558 Voice Control.......................................................559 Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................556 Speed Control See: Cruise Control............................................243 Spot Lamps......................................................93 Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................94 Stability Control...........................................230 Principle of Operation......................................230 Starter Switch See: Ignition Switch............................................175 Starting a Diesel Engine - 6.7L Diesel..............................................................178 ...................................................................................178 Automatic Engine Shutdown........................180 Cold Weather Operation.................................180 Cold Weather Starting.....................................180 Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug System...............................................................179 Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................179 Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................179 Side Airbags.....................................................52 Sitting in the Correct Position..................154 Sliding Windows...........................................102 Starting a Gasoline Engine - 6.2L/ 6.8L.................................................................176 Power Sliding Back Window..........................102 Snow Chains See: Using Snow Chains................................400 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................177 Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only).................................................178 Failure to Start......................................................177 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................178 Important Ventilating Information...............178 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving................................................................177 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................................................177 Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................176 Vehicles with Keyless Start..............................177 Special Notices................................................13 Starting and Stopping the Engine..........175 Snowplowing................................................300 Engine temperature while plowing..............301 Installing the Snowplow................................300 Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached...........................................................301 Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Vehicle...............................................................301 Transmission operation while plowing.............................................................302 Spare Wheel New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................13 On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector............................................................13 Special Instructions..............................................13 Using a Slide-In Camper....................................14 Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance............14 General Information...........................................175 Steering...........................................................259 Adaptive Steering.............................................260 Power Steering...................................................259 Steering Wheel...............................................82 Storage Compartments..............................172 654 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Tires Sunroof See: Moonroof.....................................................103 See: Wheels and Tires.....................................380 Sun Visors........................................................102 Towing a Trailer.............................................272 Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................103 Load Placement.................................................273 Supplementary Restraints System.........46 Towing Points...............................................308 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................295 Principle of Operation........................................46 Switching Off the Engine - 6.7L Diesel..............................................................183 Symbols Glossary.............................................8 SYNC™ 3.......................................................498 Emergency Towing............................................295 Recreational Towing.........................................295 Towing..............................................................272 Traction Control...........................................229 General Information.........................................498 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................560 SYNC™ Applications and Services........................................................476 Principle of Operation......................................229 Trailer Reversing Aids..................................274 Principle of Operation......................................274 Setting Up Trailer Reverse Guidance..........274 Trailer Reverse Guidance.................................274 Troubleshooting.................................................278 Using Trailer Reverse Guidance.....................277 911 Assist...............................................................476 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................478 SYNC™...........................................................460 General Information........................................460 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................490 Trailer Sway Control....................................281 Transfer Case Fluid Check.......................349 Transmission Code Designation............426 Transmission.................................................208 Transporting the Vehicle...........................307 Type Approvals.............................................637 T Tailgate Lock.....................................................72 Tailgate Step....................................................73 Closing the Step....................................................74 Opening the Step.................................................73 RF Certification Logos for Blind Spot Information System.....................................643 RF Certification Logos for Mid Range Radar.................................................................639 RF Certification Logos for Passive Anti-Theft System.......................................640 RF Certification Logos for Radio Transceiver Module..............................................................642 RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................637 Tailgate...............................................................72 Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............420 Terrain Control..............................................233 Principle of Operation......................................233 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)........................312 Tire Care..........................................................382 Glossary of Tire Terminology........................384 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................382 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall...........................................................385 Temperature A B C............................................383 Traction AA A B C..............................................383 Treadwear............................................................383 U Under Hood Overview - 6.2L...................329 Under Hood Overview - 6.7L Diesel............................................................330 F-Super Duty.......................................................330 Scheduled Maintenance..................................331 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........400 Under Hood Overview - 6.8L....................331 Under Seat Storage......................................172 Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System..............................................................407 Vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............................................................400 Rear Under Seat Storage..................................172 Universal Garage Door Opener...............166 HomeLink Wireless Control System...........166 USB Port.........................................................459 655 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............244 Using Stability Control................................231 Automatic Cancellation...................................247 Blocked Sensor..................................................248 Canceling the Set Speed.................................247 Changing the Set Speed.................................247 Detection Issues.................................................247 Following a Vehicle...........................................245 Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow Usage.................................................................247 Overriding the Set Speed...............................246 Resuming the Set Speed.................................247 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............245 Setting the Gap Distance...............................246 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off.......................................................................247 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On.......................................................................244 Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........249 System Not Available......................................248 AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC®)..............................................................231 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player.............................................................481 Accessing Your USB Song Library...............485 Bluetooth Devices and System Settings............................................................487 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port...........................................................481 Media Menu Features......................................484 Media Voice Commands................................482 USB 2......................................................................487 Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........488 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........464 Accessing Features through the Phone Menu.................................................................469 Accessing Your Phone Settings....................472 Bluetooth Devices..............................................473 Making Calls........................................................468 Pairing a Phone for the First Time..............465 Pairing Subsequent Phones.........................466 Phone Options during an Active Call........468 Phone Voice Commands...............................466 Receiving Calls...................................................468 System Settings.................................................474 Text Messaging...................................................470 Using Cruise Control...................................243 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................243 Switching Cruise Control On.........................243 Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................214 4WD Indicator Lights.........................................215 Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles.............................................................218 Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD system................................................................214 How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles.............................................................218 Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD system................................................................214 Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD system....................................................215 Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system................................................................217 Using Traction Control...............................229 Switching the System Off..............................229 System Indicator Lights and Messages.........................................................229 Using Voice Recognition...........................462 Audio Voice Commands...................................511 Climate Voice Commands..............................512 Initiating a Voice Session................................462 Mobile App Voice Commands.......................515 Navigation Voice Commands........................514 Phone Voice Commands.................................512 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands......................................................515 System Interaction and Feedback..............463 Voice Settings Commands.............................516 Using Hill Descent Control.......................233 Hill descent modes...........................................233 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................65 Using Power Running Boards...................80 Automatic Power Deploy..................................80 Automatic Power Stow.....................................80 Bounce-back..........................................................81 Enabling and Disabling.......................................81 Manual Power Deploy........................................80 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only)..........................313 Using Snow Chains....................................400 656 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing Index V High Beam.............................................................110 Hill Descent...........................................................110 Low Fuel Level......................................................110 Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................110 Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle Control............111 Service Engine Soon............................................111 Stability Control....................................................111 Stability Control Off.............................................111 Transmission Tow/Haul.....................................111 Wait To Start..........................................................112 Water In Fuel..........................................................112 Vehicle Care...................................................370 General Information.........................................370 Vehicle Certification Label.......................426 Vehicle Identification Number................425 Vehicle Storage.............................................377 Battery....................................................................378 Body.........................................................................377 Brakes.....................................................................378 Cooling system...................................................378 Engine.....................................................................378 Fuel system..........................................................378 General...................................................................377 Miscellaneous.....................................................378 Removing Vehicle From Storage..................378 Tires.........................................................................378 Washer Fluid Check....................................350 Washers See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................370 See: Wipers and Washers.................................87 Waxing..............................................................371 Wheel Nuts Ventilation See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................408 See: Climate Control.........................................146 Wheels and Tires........................................380 VIN General Information.........................................380 Technical Specifications..................................418 See: Vehicle Identification Number............425 Voice Control...................................................84 Windows and Mirrors...................................98 Windshield Washers.....................................88 Windshield Wipers.........................................87 W Speed Dependent Wipers.................................87 Warning Lamps and Indicators...............108 Wiper Blades 4X2.............................................................................111 4X4 HIGH................................................................112 4X4 LOW..................................................................111 Adaptive Cruise Control..................................108 Adaptive Steering..............................................108 Anti-Lock Braking System..............................109 Automatic High Beam......................................109 Battery....................................................................109 Blind Spot Monitor............................................109 Brake System.......................................................109 Check Fuel Cap...................................................109 Cruise Control.......................................................110 Diesel Engine Brake.............................................112 Diesel Exhaust Fluid............................................112 Direction Indicator...............................................110 Door Ajar.................................................................110 Electronic Locking Differential.......................110 Engine Coolant Temperature..........................110 Engine Oil...............................................................110 Fasten Seatbelt....................................................110 Front Airbag...........................................................110 Front Fog Lamps.................................................110 See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................355 Wipers and Washers.....................................87 657 Super Duty (TFE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Second Printing
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : Unknown Create Date : 2017:12:20 01:24:45Z Modify Date : 2018:06:07 10:10:41-05:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Format : application/pdf Title : Untitled Creator : Unknown Producer : XEP 4.16 build 20090723 Trapped : False Creator Tool : Unknown Metadata Date : 2018:06:07 10:10:41-05:00 Document ID : uuid:612f91a5-731b-4a70-9d32-1a67b5ca12d8 Instance ID : uuid:b9b98738-bc9d-4b29-9a45-20190175487e Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 660EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools